JVC KD SH1000 User Manual

CD RECEIVER

KD-SH1000

RECEPTOR CON CD

RECEPTEUR CD

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8

Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 8

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

For customer Use:

Enter below the Model

No. and Serial No. which

are located on the top or

bottom of the cabinet.

Retain this information

for future reference.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

Model No.

Serial No.

GET0364-001A

[J]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully

before operation, to ensure your complete

understanding and to obtain the best possible

performance from the unit.

CONTENTS

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

Getting started.................................

Basic operations ...............................................

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 32 – 37).

Radio operations ..............................

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations .................................... 11

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11

Playing from an SD card.................................... 11

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Sound adjustments........................... 15

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16

Activating crossover network ........................... 18

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18

Press either

one.

Press A, then

General settings — PSM ................... 20

Title assignment .............................. 24

Satellite radio operations ................. 25

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 29

Other external component operations... 31

Maintenance .................................... 31

More about this unit ......................... 32

Troubleshooting............................... 38

Specifications................................... 42

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

Temperature inside the car...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Source operation display

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

3 • Control dial

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

(angle) button

p 0 (eject) button

q 4 /¢

w Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

buttons

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

Main elements and features

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For FM/AM: Changes the preset stations.

• For SIRIUS /XM: Changes the

categories.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

Getting started

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 18) before turning on the power.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

• For FM/AM: Selects the preset station if

pressed, or store a station if pressed and

held.

• For SIRIUS /XM: Selects the preset

channels if pressed, or store a channel if

pressed and held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = SIRIUS*/XM* = CD* = SD*

= USB* = CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player*

(or EXT-IN) = LINE-IN = (back to the

beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

• For FM/AM: Searches for stations if

pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed

and held.

• For SIRIUS /XM: Changes the channels

if pressed briefly, or changes the channels

rapidly if pressed and held.

For FM/AM tuner

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

For SIRIUS radio

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

For XM tuner

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

Continued on the next page

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

To turn off the power

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

Radio operations

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

20 – 23.

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

2 Select a desired station frequency.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

DX indicator goes off and LO

indicator lights up.

Only stations with sufficient

signal strength will be detected.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

6 Select a preset number.

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

7 Store the station.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 22), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Continued on the next page

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is

selected in step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

(

)

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 18) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

• To adjust the effect level

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

Continued on the next page

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Activating BBE Digital

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

3 Select a sound mode.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

2 Select a frequency band.

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 18) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

connected speakers.

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

sound level.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items (except “Sirius ID”) listed in the table that

follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

2 Select a PSM item.

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

1 – 12 (0 – 23)

: See also page 8 for setting.

Hour adjustment

[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]

Clock M

00 – 59

: See also page 8 for setting.

Minute adjustment

[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours [Initial] : See also page 8 for setting.

Time display mode

• 24Hours

Clock Adj*¹

• Auto [Initial]

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock data

Time display mode

provided via the satellite radio channel.

: Cancels.

• Off

Time Zone*^1,*²

• Eastern [Initial] : Select your residential area from one of the following time zones

Time zone

• Atlantic

• Newfndlnd

• Alaska

for clock adjustment.

• Pacific

• Mountain

• Central

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

DST*¹

• On [Initial]

: Activates daylight savings time if your residential area is subject to

Daylight savings time

DST.

• Off

: Cancels.

Sirius ID*³

: Your SIRIUS identification number appears on the display, [25].

SIRIUS ID

Scroll*⁴

• Once [Initial]

• Auto

• Off

: Scrolls the track information once.

: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 23 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If Dimmer is set to “On”, selecting “1” to “4” takes no

effect.)

ID3 Tag

• On [Initial]

: Shows the Tag information display while playing MP3/WMA

Tag display

tracks.

: Cancels.

• Off

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 23

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 23

for setting.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

Area

• US [Initial]

• SA

: When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are

set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.

: When using in South American countries where FM interval is

100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.

: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to

9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).

Tuner channel interval

• EU

Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.

Displayed only when “Clock Adj” is set to “Auto.”

Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Continued on the next page

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*⁵

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [18], a JVC compatible satellite (SIRIUS/

External input

XM) tuner, [25], or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [29].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component than the above, [31].

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

Selecting the graphic theme

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu. 1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

2 Select the size of the display.

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

3 Select the theme.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select a character.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to station frequencies,

CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer)

and the external components (LINE-IN and

EXT-IN).

3 Move to the next (or previous)

character position.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Station

frequencies

Up to 16 characters (up to 30

station frequencies including

both FM and AM)

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

finish entering the title.

CDs/CD-CH*

External

component

Up to 16 characters

4 Finish the procedure.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

• For available characters, see page 37.

Activate your SIRIUS subscription after

connection:

Satellite radio operations

This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready—

compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio and

XM Satellite radio.

Before operating your satellite radio:

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with

your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite

radio.

JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS

channels.

Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the

preset channel, CH184.

• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are

registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

• XM and its corresponding logos are registered

trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all

related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS

Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,

Inc.

3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 21.

4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at

<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to

activate your subscription, or you can

call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-

SIRIUS (7474).

“Subscription Updated Press Any Key to

Continue” appears on the display once

subscription has been completed.

Listening to the satellite radio

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Activate your XM subscription after

connection:

• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available

• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link

Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite

radio.

before activation.

• XMDirect Universal Tuner Box—Using

a JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100:

not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite

radio.

GCI (Global Control Information) update:

• If channels are updated after subscription,

updating starts automatically.

The following appears and no sound can be

heard.

– For SIRIUS Satellite radio: “Channels

Updating XX%* Completed”

– For XM Satellite radio: “UPDATING”

• Update takes a few minutes to complete.

• During update, you cannot operate your

satellite radio.

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box starts

updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1”

is tuned in automatically.

3 Check your XM Satellite radio

ID labelled on the casing of the

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box, or

tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 27).

* Changes every 20% of update is completion,

(ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).

Continued on the next page

4 Contact XM Satellite radio on

the internet at <http://xmradio.

com/activation/> to activate your

subscription, or you can call 1-800-

XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

Once completed, the unit tunes in to one

of the available channels (Channel 4 or

higher).

Listening to the XM Satellite radio

3 Select a channel for listening.

Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio

Holding the button

changes the channels

rapidly.

Searching for category/channel

You can search for programs by category

(Category Search) or channel number (Channel

Search).

• In Category Search, you can tune in to the

channels of the selected category. Category

Search begins from the currently selected

channel.

3 Select a category.

• In Channel Search, you can tune in to

all channels (including non-categorised

channels).

You can tune in to all the channels of every

category by selecting “ALL.”

Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,

ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to

enjoy only the channels from the selected

category.

1 Select a category (Category Search).

• For Channel Search, skip

this step.

• Holding either of the buttons can display

the category list (see page 28).

2 Select a channel for listening.

4 Select a channel for listening.

If no operation is done for about 15 seconds,

Category Search is canceled.

Holding the button changes the channels

rapidly.

• When changing the category or channel,

invalid and unsubscribed channels are

skipped.

In Channel Search, channel name and

channel number appear on the display

during search.

• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed

channels are skipped.

6 Select a user preset number.

Checking the XM Satellite radio ID

While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or

“XM3,” select “Channel 0.”

• You can move to the lists of the other SIRIUS

bands by turning the control dial.

7 Store the channel.

The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and

the 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.

To cancel the ID number display, select any

channel other than “Channel 0.”

Listening to a user preset channel

Storing user channels in memory

You can preset six channels for each band.

Ex.: Storing a SIRIUS channel into preset

number 4 of the SR1 band.

• Holding this button displays the User

Preset Channel List (see step 6 above).

3 Perform steps 3 to 6 (on the left

column) to select a user preset

channel.

• Holding the button displays the User

Preset Channel List (see step 6 on the

right column).

4 Finish the procedure.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

4 Select “Preset.”

Selecting a channel from the list

Selecting a category/channel on the

list

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “Channel.”

Selecting a category from the list

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “Category.”

4 Select a channel you want.

4 Select a category you want.

• You can move to the other lists by turning

the control dial.

• You can move to the other lists by turning

the control dial.

5 Finish the procedure.

To change the display information while

listening to a channel

The first channel of the selected category is

tuned in.

• If you select the current category

(highlighted on the display), its channel

list appears.

Category name and channel name = Artist/

composer* name and song/program name = Clock

= Small graphic display = Large graphic display

= (back to the beginning)

Holding 5/∞ also shows the Category List

while listening to a channel.

* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To resume playback,

press it again.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 22.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Selecting a track from the menu

Selecting the playback modes

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

3 Select an item (see table below).

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

Repeat play

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

3 Confirm the selection.

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

29 – 30.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 22

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

Continued on the next page

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

To play new discs

Turning off the power

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

How to handle SD card

• During SSM search...

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will

be shown on the display.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 22) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

– WMA files which are not based upon

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Changing the source

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

• You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to

adjust it.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings — PSM

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

Sound adjustments

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to create a being-there

feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press MENU

to go back to the operation screen of the

current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

Title assignment

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name

Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before

assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vice versa.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 21). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Satellite radio operations

• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio

PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS

radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to

the CD changer jack on the rear.

By turning on/off the power of the unit, you

can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you

cannot control it from this unit.

• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or

to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».

• For the latest channel listings and

programming information, or to sign up for

XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.

com».

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.

Accented letters: upper case

Numbers and symbols

Accented letters: lower case

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+02

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+04

+06

Hard Rock

R&B

+06

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+06

+02

+04

+02

–02

Pop

Jazz

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

+02

–04

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User 2

User 3

+02

+04

+02

+04

+02

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 31).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

installation.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 14).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 37).

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 37).

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE”

scrolls on the display while listening to the

SIRIUS Satellite radio.

Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page 25).

• No sound can be heard. “Channel Updating

XX%* Completed” appears on the display.

The unit is updating the channel information and it takes a

few minutes to complete.

• Either “No Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on Move to an area where signals are stronger.

the display.

• Either “No Antenna” or “CHECK ANTENNA”

appears on the display.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• “Invalid Channel” appears on the display for

No broadcast on the selected channel.

about 5 seconds, then returns to the previous Select another channel or continue listening to the previous

display while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite channel.

radio.

• “No Name” appears or scrolls on the display

while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.

• “---” appears on the display while listening to

the XM Satellite radio.

No text information for the selected channel.

• “---” appears on the display for about 2

Selected channel is no longer available or is unauthorized.

seconds, then returns to the previous channel Select another channel or continue listening to the previous

while listening to the XM Satellite radio.

channel.

• “OFF AIR” appears on the display while

listening to the XM Satellite radio.

Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.

* Changes every 20% of update is completion, (ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “LOADING” appears on the display while

listening to the XM Satellite radio.

Select another channel or continue listening to the previous

channel.

• “Reset 08” appears on the display.

The unit is loading the channel information and audio. Text

information are temporarily unavailable.

• Satellite radio does not work at all.

Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio correctly and

reset this unit.

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

29).

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Power Output:

20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω and ≤

1% THD+N

Signal to Noise Ratio:

80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Line-In:

Line-Out:

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

(with channel interval set to 200 kHz)

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)

530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

AM:

(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

FM Tuner

AM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

20 μV/65 dB

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

MP3:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

FAT 12/16

Format:

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

FAT 12/16/32

Format:

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

Operating Voltage:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

(7-3/16 × 2-1/16 × 6-7/16 )

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

(7-7/16 × 2-5/16 × 7/16 )

Mass (approx.):

1.7 kg (3.8 lbs) (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio

speciality shop.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Still having trouble??

USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

http://www.jvc.com

We can help you!

EN, SP, FR

0206DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual de instalación/conexión

Manuel d’installation/raccordement

GET0364-002A

[J]

0206DTSMDTJEIN

EN, SP, FR

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser

dealers.

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con

sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant

continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce

type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous

pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para

automóviles.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before

installing the unit.

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher

negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas

antes de instalar la unidad.

la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements

électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis

del automóvil después de la instalación.

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de

cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

Notes:

Notas:

Remarques:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el

fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario

de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima

de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia

de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie

“Amp Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 22

del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta

aislante.

• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese

de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute

souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de

plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une

impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est

inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager

vos enceintes (voir page 22 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont

PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being

damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire

attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Heat sink

Sumidero térmico

Dissipateur de chaleur

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker

connections:

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la

fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la

connexion des enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon

d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait

sérieusement endommagé.

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation

aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían

producirse graves daños en la unidad.

• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del

cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su

automóvil.

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún

consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et

raccordement

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose

elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de

JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Estuche duro/Panel de control

Etui de transport/Panneau de commande

Sleeve

Cubierta

Manchon

Trim plate

Placa de guarnición

Plaque d’assemblage

Power cord

Cordón de alimentación

Cordon d’alimentation

Washer (ø5)

Arandela (ø5)

Rondelle (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Tuerca de seguridad (M5)

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)

Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")

Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pulgada)

Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pouces)

Rubber cushion

Cojín de goma

Amortisseur en

caoutchouc

Handles

Manijas

Poignées

Remote controller

Control remoto

Télécommade

Battery

Pila

Pile

INSTALLATION

INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL

TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE

TABLEAU DE BORD)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any

questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult

your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed

by a qualified technician.

La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna

pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si

vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits

instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une

para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.

• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,

hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le

faire installer par un technicien qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.

Realice las conexiones eléctricas

requeridas.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para

retener firmemente la manga en su

lugar.

Tordez les languettes appropriées pour

maintenir le manchon en place.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible provisto en la parte posterior.

Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.

Fit the protrusions outside the unit.

Haga encajar los salientes del exterior de la unidad.

Fixez les protubérances à l’extérieur de l’appareil.

Extracción de la unidad

Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Retrait de l’appareil

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,

extráigalas de la manera indicada en

la ilustración para poder desmontar la

unidad.

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la

façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un

soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en

option

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar

la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.

Stay (option)

Soporte (opción)

Hauban (en option)

Fire wall

Tabique a prueba de incendios

Cloison

Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8")*³

Not supplied for this unit.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm

Dashboard

Tablero de

(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*³

Bracket*³

Ménsula*³

Support*³

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*³

instrumentos

Tableau de bord

Screw (option)

Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8")*³

Tornillo (opción)

Vis (en option)

Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm

Pocket

Compartimiento

Poche

(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*³

Bracket*³

Ménsula*³

Support*³

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*³

Note

Nota

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8")-long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de

longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm

(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

Caution when installing / Precaución en la instalación / Précautions lors de l’installation

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

Introduzca el receptor en la manga de montaje utilizando las cuatro esquinas de la placa decorativa.

• NO presione el panel (sombreado en la ilustración).

Fixez l’appareil sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.

• NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le

câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager

sérieusement l’appareil.

Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de

la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del

vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.

body may be different in color.

Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes

de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre

1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el

specified in the illustration below.

spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.

3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

2 Conecte el cable de antena.

3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à 3 voies,

référez-vous au diagramme pour la connexion des enceintes.

Si ha instalado el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías en su

automóvil, véase el diagrama para la conexión de los altavoces.

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your

car, see diagram for speaker connection.

To subwoofer (see diagram

Al subwoofer (véase diagrama

)

Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme

)

LINE IN

(see diagram / véase el diagrama /voir le diagramme

Antenna connector

Conector de antena

Connecteur d’antenne

)

15 A fuse

Fusible de 15 A

Fusible 15 A

Ignition switch

Interruptor de encendido

Interrupteur d’allumage

Black

Negro

Noir

To metallic body or chassis of the car

A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Rear ground terminal

Terminal de tierra

posterior

Yellow*⁵

Amarillo*⁵

Jaune*⁵

Borne arrière de masse

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Line out (see diagram

)

A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del

automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)

A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la

voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Salida de línea (véase diagrama

)

Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme

)

To external components (see diagram

A los componentes externos (véase el diagrama

Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme

)

Fuse block

Bloque de fusibles

)

Red

Porte-fusible

Rojo

Rouge

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Not supplied for this unit.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

Blue with white stripe

Azul con rayas blancas

Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if

any (200 mA max.)

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática,

si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne

automatique s’il y en a une

(200 mA max.)

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad

previa a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable,

de lo contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.

Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant

installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut

pas être mis sous tension.

Orange with white stripe

Naranja con rayas blancas

Orange avec bande blanche

To car light control switch

Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil

À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture

Brown

Marrón

Marrone

To cellular phone system

Al sistema de teléfono celular

Al cellulare

White with black stripe

Blanco con rayas negras

Blanc avec bande noire

White

Blanco

Blanc

Gray with black stripe

Gris con rayas negras

Gris avec bande noire

Gray

Gris

Green with black stripe

Verde con rayas negras

Vert avec bande noire

Green

Verde

Vert

Purple with black stripe

Púrpura con rayas negras

Violet avec bande noire

Purple

Púrpura

Violet

Left speaker (front)

Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)

Enceinte gauche (avant)

Right speaker (front)

Altavoz derecho (frontal)

Enceinte droit (avant)

Left speaker (rear)

Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)

Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Right speaker (rear)

Altavoz derecho (trasero)

Enceinte droit (arrière)

FRANÇAIS

ESPAÑOL

ENGLISH

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs

extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre

système autoradio.

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)

au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il

puisse être commandé via cet appareil.

Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo

de su automóvil.

• Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor

remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta

unidad.

• For amplifier only:

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them

to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit

unused.

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio

signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and

to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 22 of

the INSTRUCTIONS).

• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:

• Sólo para el amplificador:

– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-

les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet

appareil inutilisés.

– Vous pouvez désactiver l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les

signaux audio uniquement à un ou plusieurs amplificateurs

extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et pour éviter un

échauffement interne de l’appareil (voir page 22 du MANUEL

D’INSTRUCTIONS).

– Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al

amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad

quedan sin usar.

– Podrá desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las señales

de audio solamente al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener

sonidos nítidos y evitar que se caliente el interior de la unidad.

Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen

separado).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the

hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down

the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best

performance from this unit.

– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un

niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons

reproduits par cet appareil.

Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil,

diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour

obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.

– El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece alto para que

corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad reproducidos por

esta unidad.

Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya

el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un

óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Remote lead

Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cable remoto

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Fil d’alimentation à distance

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

Rear speakers

Altavoces posteriores

Enceintes arrière

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo

contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord

la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS

• El fusible se quema.

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• Le fusible saute.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.

• No es posible conectar la alimentación.

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.

• No sale sonido de los altavoces.

• Pas de son des enceintes.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.

• El sonido presenta distorsión.

• Le son est déformé.

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

shorter and thicker cords?

• Perturbación de ruido.

* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil

utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?

• Interférence avec les sons.

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la

voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

• La unidad se calienta.

• L’appareil devient chaud.

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Conexiones de los altavoces para el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías / Connexion

des enceintes pour un système d’enceintes à 3 voies

Vous pouvez recréer un monde de “son pur” dans votre voiture en

connectant un système d’enceintes à trois voies (hautes fréquences/

moyennes fréquences/extrêmes graves).

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-

way network speaker system (high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

Podrá disfrutar de un “sonido puro” en su automóvil conectando un

sistema de altavoces de 3 vías (rango alto/rango medio/subwoofer).

IMPORTANT:

IMPORTANTE:

IMPORTANT:

Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à trois voies

dans votre voiture, assurez-vous

Si ha instalado el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías en el

automóvil, compruebe lo siguiente.

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in

the car, make sure of the following.

de ce qui suit.

• Conecte el sistema de altavoces de la manera mostrada en la

siguiente ilustración.

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset

the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for

HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.

• Connectez le système d’enceintes comme montré ci-dessous.

• Avant d’utiliser le système, mettez en service le réseau de

transition et préréglez les fréquences de

coupure appropriées pour HPF/LPF (plus spécialement pour

HPF); sinon, les enceintes risqueraient

• Antes de usar el sistema, active la red de cruce y preajuste las

frecuencias de corte apropiadas para HPF/LPF (especialmente

para HPF); de lo contrario, se podrán dañar los altavoces.

• Para los detalles acerca del ajuste, consulte las páginas

18 y 19 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.

d’être endommagées.

• Pour en savoir plus sur les réglages, référez-vous aux pages 18 et

19 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

Cuando conecte los altavoces (rango alto/rango medio) a través de la salida de altavoz

Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) aux sorties d’enceinte

Gray

Gris

White

Blanco

Blanc

Left high-range speaker

Altavoz de rango alto izquierdo

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche

Right high-range speaker

Altavoz de rango alto derecho

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences

droit

Gray with black stripe

Gris con rayas negras

Gris avec bande noire

White with black stripe

Blanco con rayas negras

Blanc avec bande noire

Green

Verde

Vert

Purple

Púrpura

Violet

Right mid-range speaker

Altavoz de rango mediano

derecho

Haut-parleur moyennes

fréquences droit

Left mid-range speaker

Altavoz de rango medio izquierdo

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche

Purple with black stripe

Púrpura con rayas negras

Violet avec bande noire

Green with black stripe

Verde con rayas negras

Vert avec bande noire

Connecting subwoofer / Conexión del subwoofer / Connexion du haut-parleur

d’extrêmes graves

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

Remote lead

Cable remoto

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

To subwoofer out

A salida del

subwoofer

À la sortie du

caisson de grave

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound

Cuando conecte los altavoces (rango alto/rango medio) a través de los amplificadores externos—para obtener un sonido más

potente

Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) à travers des amplificateurs extérieurs—pour

obtenir un son plus puissant

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

To LINE OUT (REAR)

A LINE OUT (REAR)

À LINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

A LINE OUT (FRONT)

À LINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

Altavoz de rango alto izquierdo

Altavoz de rango alto derecho

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit

gauche

Left mid-range speaker

Altavoz de rango medio izquierdo

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences

gauche

Right mid-range speaker

Altavoz de rango mediano derecho

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo

contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord

la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

Connecting the external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs

JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM,

iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Changer” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) /

Réglez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.

• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP

—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit.

• The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface

adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for

D. player).

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur

Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra

en la ilustración de abajo.

l’illustration.

•

Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP JVC

—Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet appareil.

• Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link

Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor.

• Puede conectar el iPod*⁵o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador

de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500

(para el reproductor D.).

• Le iPod*⁵ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un

adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou

KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido

separadamente)

JVC DLP

DLP JVC

Processeur DLP JVC

JVC CD changer

Cambiador de CD de JVC

Changeur de CD JVC

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC

Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).

• Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un

adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).

• Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect (vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur

numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni).

Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)

Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)

To CD changer, KS-PD100,

or KS-PD500

Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect

)

Al cambiador de CD,

KS-PD100 o KS-PD500

Au changeur de CD,

KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect™

Tuner universel XMDirect

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido

separadamente)

JVC DLP

DLP JVC

Processeur DLP JVC

JVC CD changer

Cambiador de CD de JVC

Changeur de CD JVC

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)

Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)

Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect

)

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect™

Tuner universel XMDirect

CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:

• Before connecting the external components,

make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Antes de conectar los componentes

externos, asegúrese de que la unidad esté

apagada.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod es una marca comercial de Apple

Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y

otros países.

iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple

Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et

dans les autres pays.

Connecting cord supplied with your

JVC CD changer or DLP

Conexión del cable suministrado para

su cambiador de CD o DLP JVC

Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre

changeur CD ou processeur DLP JVC

Signal cord supplied with your

Smart Digital Adapter

Cable de señal suministrado con el

adaptador Smart Digital

Cordon de signal fourni avec votre

adaptateur numérique intelligent

Audio signal cord supplied with your

Smart Digital Adapter

Cable de señal de audio suministrado

con el adaptador Smart Digital

Cordon audio fourni avec votre

adaptateur numérique intelligent

• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,

assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Ext In” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez

Stereo mini plug

Miniclavija estéreo

Fiche stéré mini

To headphones jack

Al jack para auriculares

À la prise du casque d’écoute

“Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter,

KS-U100K (not supplied).

• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP.

También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador

para radio SIRIUS JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado).

• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.

Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de

DC power plug

Clavija de alimentación de CC

Fiche d’alimentation CC

To DC IN jack

Al jack DC IN

À la prise DC IN

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

radio SIRIUS JVC KS-U100K (non fourni).

Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC.

•

Prise du changeur CD

Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil extérieur

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Ext In” para

el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Ext In”

pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil extérieur

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil extérieur

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil extérieur

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied

for this unit)

Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no

suministrado con esta unidad)

Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non

fourni avec cet autoradio)

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for

this unit)

Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no

suministrado con esta unidad)

Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non

fourni avec cet appareil)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm

Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm

CD RECEIVER

KD-SH1000

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0365-001A

[U/UH]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card

first (see page 11).

Notice:

The display window built in this unit has

been produced with high precision, but

it may have some ineffective dots. This is

inevitable and is not malfunction.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

Getting started.................................

Press briefly.

Basic operations ...............................................

Radio operations ..............................

Disc/SD card/USB memory

Press repeatedly.

operations .................................... 11

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11

Playing from an SD card.................................... 11

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12

Press either

one.

Press A, then

Sound adjustments........................... 15

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16

Activating crossover network ........................... 18

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

General settings — PSM ................... 20

Title assignment .............................. 23

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24

Other external component operations... 26

Maintenance .................................... 26

More about this unit ......................... 27

Troubleshooting............................... 32

Specifications................................... 36

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Source operation display

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

3 • Control dial

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

(angle) button

p 0 (eject) button

q 4 /¢

w Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

buttons

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

Main elements and features

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For FM/AM: Changes the preset stations.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

Getting started

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 18) before turning on the power.

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

• For FM/AM: Selects the preset station if

pressed, or store a station if pressed and

held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = CD* = SD* = USB* =

CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player* (or EXT-IN)

= LINE-IN = (back to the beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Adjust the volume.

• For FM/AM: Searches for stations if

pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed

and held.

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Radio operations

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

20 – 22.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

3 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

DX indicator goes off and LO indicator

lights up.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength

will be detected.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

6 Select a preset number.

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

7 Store the station.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Continued on the next page

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

)

(

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 18) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

• To adjust the effect level

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

Continued on the next page

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

Activating BBE Digital

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

3 Select a sound mode.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

2 Select a frequency band.

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 18) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

connected speakers.

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

sound level.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

1 – 12 (0 – 23)

: See also page 8 for setting.

Hour adjustment

[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]

Clock M

00 – 59

: See also page 8 for setting.

Minute adjustment

[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours [Initial] : See also page 8 for setting.

Time display mode

• 24Hours

Scroll*¹

• Once [Initial]

• Auto

• Off

: Scrolls the track information once.

: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes

no effect.)

ID3 Tag

Tag display

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.

: Cancels.

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22

for setting.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*²

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,

External input

[24].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component, [26].

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

Selecting the graphic theme

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu. 1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

2 Select the size of the display.

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

3 Select the theme.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select a character.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to station frequencies,

CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer)

and the external components (LINE-IN and

EXT-IN).

3 Move to the next (or previous)

character position.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Station

frequencies

Up to 16 characters (up to 30

station frequencies including

bothe FM and AM)

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

CDs/CD-CH*

finish entering the title.

External

component

Up to 16 characters

4 Finish the procedure.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

• For available characters, see page 31.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To resume playback,

press it again.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 21.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Selecting a track from the menu

Selecting the playback modes

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

3 Select an item (see table below).

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

Repeat play

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

3 Confirm the selection.

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

24 and 25.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

To play new discs

Turning off the power

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

How to handle SD card

• During SSM search...

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

Continued on the next page

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will

be shown on the display.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

Windows Media Audio.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Continued on the next page

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

Sound adjustments

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to creates a being-

there feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name

Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before

assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vise versa.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press MENU

to go back to the operation screen of the

current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 20). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

• You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to

adjust it.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

General settings — PSM

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.

Accented letters: upper case

Numbers and symbols

Accented letters: lower case

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+02

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+04

+06

Hard Rock

R&B

+06

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+06

+02

+04

+02

–02

Pop

Jazz

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

+02

–04

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User 2

User 3

+02

+04

+02

+04

+02

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 26).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

installation.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 14).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

24).

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Maximum Power

Output:

Continuous Power

Output (RMS):

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to

20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total

harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Signal to Noise Ratio:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

70 dB

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-In:

Line-Out:

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/65 dB

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection

System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16/32

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

Panel Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

1.7 kg (excluding accessories)

Mass (approx.):

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, TH

0206DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß

GET0365-006A

[U/UH]

0206DTSMDTJEIN

EN, TH

‰∑¬

ENGLISH

™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õß§ÿ≥‰¡‰

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

§”‡µÕπ

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß

• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“ß‡§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:

Notes:

• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear

and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change

“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ß¢∫ ß

∂“°”≈ß¢∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “Amp Gain” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√

• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæπ¢« “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæπ “¬‰ø

• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π

Heat sink

·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ

¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

•

Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°

• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§ÿ≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer

immediately.

√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π

«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Sleeve

Trim plate

≈ß∫√√®

ª≈Õ°À

·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß

Power cord

“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß

Washer (ø5)

ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

πÕµ≈Õ§(M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

≈°µ¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)

^R¬“^uß^b°^bπ^e°^r√^c–^u·^s∑^hi°^on

^B·∫^atµ^te‡µ^ryÕ√

^H§π^a∫^ndß§^le∫^s

Remote controller

√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

¿“æµ«Õ¬“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§

¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…

• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™

Do the required electrical connections.

µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”Àπ¥‰«∑ßÀ¡¥

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Fit the protrusions outside the unit.

*¹‡¡Õ§

*²µ¥µß≈«π∑¬πÕÕ°¡“∑¥“ππÕ°‡§√Õß

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫

°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

„ §π∫ß§∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥

¥ß¿“æ®“°ππ „À‡≈Õπ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–

∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ß§∫∑ß ÕßÕπÕÕ°®“°°π

When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

µ«Õ¬“ß‡™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑

Fire wall

ºπß°π‰ø

Stay (option)

µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*³

Not supplied for this unit.

^*³‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

^D·º^aß^shÀ^bπ^o“^aª^r∑^d¡

Bracket*³

·∑π√Õß√∫*³

Screw (option)

°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*³

^P°–^o‡^cª^k“^e–^t

Bracket*³

·∑π√Õß√∫*³

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“

À¡“¬‡Àµ

‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥

Caution when installing / ¢Õ§«√√–«ß‡¡Õ∑”°“√µ¥µß

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

µ¥µß‡§√Õß‡¢“„πª≈Õ°À

ÿ¡ „Àµ√ß°∫¢Õ∫¢Õß ·ºπ∑µ¥·µß∑ß

• À“¡¥π∑·ºß§«∫§¡ ( «π∑√–∫“¬ „π√ª)

°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™

°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™¥ª•–

°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õß†“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕª°••µÕ‡™•Õ¡®“°µ«• ß••Õ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡•Õ•°

ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•

damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫

2ꢀ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»

3ꢀ ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π

ÿ„π√ª¥“π≈“ß

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car, see diagram for speaker

connection.

À“°µ¥µß√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑»∑“ß„π√∂¬πµ ¢Õ„À¥·ºπºß „π°“√µÕ≈”‚æß¥«¬

To subwoofer (see diagram

)

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß´∫«ø‡øÕ√ꢀ(¥·ºπ¿¡ )

LINE IN

Antenna connector

(see diagram / (¥·ºπ¿¡ )

∑µÕ ”À√∫ “¬Õ“°“»

15 A fuse

ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A

Ignition switch

«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥

Black

¥”

To metallic body or chassis of the car

µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

Rear ground terminal

®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß

Yellow*⁵

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

‡À≈Õß*⁵

µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ

(‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)

Fuse block

·ºßø«

Line out (see diagram

“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ )

)

Red

·¥ß

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«

Blue

»ø“

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)

To external components (see diagram

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ )

)

Blue with white stripe

π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

)

µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA

Orange with white stripe

Not supplied for this unit.

¡·∂∫¢“«

To car light control switch

*⁴‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

«µ´§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Brown

*⁵°Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß

π”µ“≈

To cellular phone system

µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õß‰¥

µÕ°∫‚∑√»æ∑‡§≈Õπ∑

White with black stripe

White

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

Gray with black stripe

¢“«·∂∫¥”

¢“«

‡∑“

‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”

‡¢¬«

¡«ß·∂∫¥”

¡«ß

‡∑“·∂∫¥”

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈ß)

‰∑¬

ENGLISH

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / µÕ·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√·≈–/À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“ππÕ°

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√‰¥À≈“¬µ«‡æÕ‡æ¡§ÿ≥¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ„π√∂¬πµ

• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥Õπ Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–

°Õ∫π‰¥

• For amplifier only:

• ≈”À√∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√‡∑“ππ:

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads

of this unit unused.

–

∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°®“°™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π ·≈««µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õß¢¬“¬ ∑ß“¬µ–°«≈”‚æß¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰«

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get

clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to

obtain the best performance from this unit.

∑“π “¡“√∂ª¥·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ∑µ¥µßÕ¬„π‡§√Õß ·≈« ß ≠≠“≥‡ ¬ß‰ª¬ß ·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√¿“¬πÕ°

‡æ¬ßÕ¬“ß‡¥¬«‰¥ ‡æÕ„À‡ ¬ß∑‰¥§¡™¥ ·≈–ªÕß°π‡§√Õß‰¡„À√Õπ (¥Àπ“ 21 §”·π–π”)

–

≈≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°‡§√Õß®–¬ß§ßÕ¬„π√–¥∫≈ß ‡æÕ„À‡≈¬ß∑‰¥‡ªπ‡≈¬ß‰Œ-‰ø ‡¡ÕµÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√¿“¬πÕ°

„Àª¥ªÿ¡§«∫§ÿ¡Õµ√“¢¬“¬ ∑·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√¿“¬πÕ° ‡æÕ„À‡§√Õß¡ª√–≈∑∏¿“æ°“√∑”ß“π≈ß≈ÿ¥

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

Remote lead

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•

To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)

µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Subwoofer

´∫«‡øÕ√

Rear speakers

≈”‚æßÀ≈ß

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Front speakers

≈”‚æßÀπ“

Front speakers

≈”‚æßÀπ“

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*²“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂ß‡À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂µ√ß «π∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π) À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”π ‡§√ÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥

°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß

TROUBLESHOOTING

• ø« ¢“¥

• The fuse blows.

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õß‰¥

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡

• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡

• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / °“√µÕ≈”‚æß ”À√∫√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑»∑“ß

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system

(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂‡æ≈¥‡æ≈π°∫‚≈°¢Õß “√–∫∫‡ ¬ß ¡∫√≥·∫∫” „π√∂¬πµ‰¥ ¥«¬°“√µÕ√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑»∑“ß

(æ ¬ ß/æ ¬°≈“ß/´∫«ø‡Õ√)

IMPORTANT:

¢Õ§«√∑√“∫∑ ”§≠:

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following.

À“°µ¥µß√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑»∑“ß„π√∂¬πµ ¢Õ„À¥®

• °“√µÕ “¬√–∫∫≈”‚æßµ“¡√ª

ÿ¥µÕ‰ªπ„À¥

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• °Õπ„™ß“π√–∫∫ ¢Õ„À‡ª¥√–∫∫¢“¡‡§√Õ¢“¬ ·≈–µß§≈π§«“¡∂µ¥ ”À√∫ HPF/LPF °Õπ (‚¥¬‡©æ“– ”À√∫ HPF )

‰¡‡™πππ≈”‚æßÕ“®‡ ¬‰¥

• ¥√“¬≈–‡Õ¬¥„π°“√µß§“‰¥„π§¡Õ°“√„™ß“πÀπ“ 18 – 19

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for

HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

‡¡Õ®–µÕ≈”‚æß (æ ¬ ß/æ ¬°≈“ß)º“π¢« ß ≠≠“≥ÕÕ°≈”‚æß

White

Gray

¢“«

‡∑“

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

≈”‚æßæ ¬ ß¥“π¢«“

Gray with black stripe

White with black stripe

¢“«·∂∫¥”

≈”‚æßæ ¬ ß¥“π´“¬

‡∑“·∂∫¥”

Green

Purple

‡¢¬«

¡«ß

Right mid-range speaker

≈”‚æßæ ¬°≈“ß¥“π¢«“

Left mid-range speaker

≈”‚æßæ ¬°≈“ß¥“π´“¬

Green with black stripe

‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”

Purple with black stripe

¡«ß·∂∫¥”

^{Connecting subwoofer /}°“√µÕ™∫«‡øÕ√

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)

Remote lead

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•

¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

´∫«ø‡Õ√

^T™Õ^oß^s‡^ub¬^w∫^oµ^oÕ^f¢^eÕ^rß^out

≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°´∫«ø‡øÕ√

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to

obtain more powerful sound

‡¡Õ®–µÕßµÕ≈”‚æß (æ ¬ ß/æ ¬°≈“ß)º“π‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ° ‡æÕ„À‡ ¬ß∑‰¥¡æ≈ß¡“°¢π

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

To LINE OUT (REAR)

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß LINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß LINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

≈”‚æßæ ¬ ß¥“π´“¬

≈”‚æßæ ¬ ß¥“π¢«“

Left mid-range speaker

Right mid-range speaker

≈”‚æßæ ¬°≈“ß¥“π´“¬

≈”‚æßæ ¬°≈“ß¥“π¢«“

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*⁴“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂ß‡À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂ µ√ß «π∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π) À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”π ‡§√ÕßÕ“®™”√

À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥

ÿ¥

Connecting the external components / °“√µÕ‡æ¡‡µ¡‡¢“°∫Õ

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD ‡™π‡®Õ√, Apple iPod® À√Õ‡§√Õß‡≈π JVC D.

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

ÿª°√≥ÕπÊ

µß§“ “Changer” ‡ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 21 §”·π–π”)

You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using

an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

∑“π “¡“√∂µÕÕÿª°√≥¥ß°≈“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥“π≈“ß

∑“π “¡“√∂‡™Õ¡µÕ iPod*⁵À√Õ‡§√Õß‡≈π D. ‚¥¬„™Õπ‡∑Õ√‡ø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ (‰¡¡¡“„À)—KS-PD100 ( ”À√∫

iPod) À√Õ KS-PD500 ( ”À√∫‡§√Õß‡≈π D.)

CAUTION / ¢Õ§«√√–«ß

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• °Õπ®–‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“ª¥‡§√ÕßÕ¬

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)

À√Õ

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

‡§√Õß‡≈π JVC D. (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)

JVC CD changer

JVC CD ‡™π‡®Õ√

CD changer jack

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß

‡§√Õß‡≈π ^CD

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»ÕπÊ

*⁶µÕ “¬∑„À¡“ ”À√∫ CD ‡™π‡®Õ√

Other external component / Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°ÕπÊ

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

µß§“ “Ext In” ‡∫ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 21 §”·π–π”)

External component

Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°

CD changer jack

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß

‡§√Õß‡≈π ^CD

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

¢«‡ ¬∫¡π ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡.

External component

Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°

External component

Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*⁷Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√ “¬ ≠≠“≥‡¢“ KS-U57 (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√√∫ ≠≠“≥ AUX √

*⁹“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

CD RECEIVER

KD-SH1000

ALAT PENERIMA CD

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.

INSTRUCTIONS

BUKU PETUNJUK

GET0365-004A

[UN]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card

first (see page 11).

Notice:

The display window built in this unit has

been produced with high precision, but

it may have some ineffective dots. This is

inevitable and is not malfunction.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

Getting started.................................

Press briefly.

Basic operations ...............................................

Radio operations ..............................

Disc/SD card/USB memory

Press repeatedly.

operations .................................... 11

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11

Playing from an SD card.................................... 11

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12

Press either

one.

Press A, then

Sound adjustments........................... 15

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16

Activating crossover network ........................... 18

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

General settings — PSM ................... 20

Title assignment .............................. 23

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24

Other external component operations... 26

Maintenance .................................... 26

More about this unit ......................... 27

Troubleshooting............................... 32

Specifications................................... 36

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Source operation display

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

3 • Control dial

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

(angle) button

p 0 (eject) button

q 4 /¢

w Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

buttons

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

Main elements and features

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For FM/AM: Changes the preset stations.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

Getting started

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 18) before turning on the power.

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

• For FM/AM: Selects the preset station if

pressed, or store a station if pressed and

held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = CD* = SD* = USB* =

CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player* (or EXT-IN)

= LINE-IN = (back to the beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Adjust the volume.

• For FM/AM: Searches for stations if

pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed

and held.

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Radio operations

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

20 – 22.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

3 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

DX indicator goes off and LO indicator

lights up.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength

will be detected.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

6 Select a preset number.

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

7 Store the station.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Continued on the next page

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

)

(

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 18) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

• To adjust the effect level

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

Continued on the next page

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

Activating BBE Digital

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

3 Select a sound mode.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

2 Select a frequency band.

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 18) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

connected speakers.

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

sound level.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

1 – 12 (0 – 23)

: See also page 8 for setting.

Hour adjustment

[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]

Clock M

00 – 59

: See also page 8 for setting.

Minute adjustment

[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours [Initial] : See also page 8 for setting.

Time display mode

• 24Hours

Scroll*¹

• Once [Initial]

• Auto

• Off

: Scrolls the track information once.

: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes

no effect.)

ID3 Tag

Tag display

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.

: Cancels.

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22

for setting.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*²

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,

External input

[24].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component, [26].

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

Selecting the graphic theme

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu. 1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

2 Select the size of the display.

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

3 Select the theme.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select a character.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to station frequencies,

CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer)

and the external components (LINE-IN and

EXT-IN).

3 Move to the next (or previous)

character position.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Station

frequencies

Up to 16 characters (up to 30

station frequencies including

bothe FM and AM)

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

CDs/CD-CH*

finish entering the title.

External

component

Up to 16 characters

4 Finish the procedure.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

• For available characters, see page 31.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To resume playback,

press it again.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 21.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Selecting a track from the menu

Selecting the playback modes

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

3 Select an item (see table below).

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

Repeat play

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

3 Confirm the selection.

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

24 and 25.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

To play new discs

Turning off the power

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

How to handle SD card

• During SSM search...

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

Continued on the next page

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will

be shown on the display.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

Windows Media Audio.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Continued on the next page

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

Sound adjustments

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to creates a being-

there feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name

Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before

assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vise versa.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press MENU

to go back to the operation screen of the

current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 20). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

• You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to

adjust it.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

General settings — PSM

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.

Accented letters: upper case

Numbers and symbols

Accented letters: lower case

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+02

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+04

+06

Hard Rock

R&B

+06

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+06

+02

+04

+02

–02

Pop

Jazz

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

+02

–04

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User 2

User 3

+02

+04

+02

+04

+02

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 26).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

installation.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 14).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

24).

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Maximum Power

Output:

Continuous Power

Output (RMS):

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to

20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total

harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Signal to Noise Ratio:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

70 dB

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-In:

Line-Out:

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/65 dB

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection

System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16/32

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

Panel Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

1.7 kg (excluding accessories)

Mass (approx.):

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Ada MASALAH dengan cara

pengoperasian?

Setel kembali unit Anda

Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda

EN, IN

0206DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan

GET0365-009A

[UN]

0206DTSMDTJEIN

EN, IN

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli

di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.

WARNINGS

PERINGATAN

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.

• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.

Notes:

Catatan:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada

dealer. penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear • Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya

and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change

“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang

dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “Amp Gain” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker

dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan

pita isolasi.

• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika

memindahkan alat penerima ini.

Heat sink

Pendingin

TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan

sambungan-sambungan speaker:

• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,

alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.

• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan

speaker dalam mobil anda.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan

Parts list for installation and connection

Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada item yang hilang, segera hubungi

dealer audio mobil JVC anda.

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer

immediately.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Kotak keras/Panel kontrol

Sleeve

Selongsong

Trim plate

Plat rapi

Power cord

Kabel power

Washer (ø5)

Perapat sambungan (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Mur kunci (M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)

Rubber cushion

Bantalan karet

Remote controller

Pengontrol jauh

Battery

Baterai

Handles

Pegangan-pegangan

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau

informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC

atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.

• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan

teknisi yang berkualitas.

Do the required electrical connections.

Lakukan penyambungan-

penyambungan listrik yang diperlukan.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat

untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat

pada tempatnya.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.

Fit the protrusions outside the unit.

Pasangkan tonjolan keluar di sebelah luar radio.

Memindahkan alat penerima

Removing the unit

Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan

tarik alat penerima seperti yang

diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima

dapat dipindahkan.

When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan

penguat tambahan

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima

tanpa menggunakan selongsong

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.

Fire wall

Dinding tahan api

Stay (option)

Penguat (tambahan)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Not supplied for this unit.

Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Dashboard

Tempat alat pada

bagian depan

Bracket*³

Breket*³

Screw (option)

Sekrup (tambahan)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Pocket

Kantong

Bracket*³

Breket*³

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-skerup panjang–

8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang dari

30˚.

Catatan

Caution when installing / Pasangkan tonjolan keluar di sebelah luar radio

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

Pasangkan radio ke dalam selongsong dengan menggunakan empat sudut dari plat.

• JANGAN menekan panel (yang berbayang di dalam ilustrasi).

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang

tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.

Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.

2 Sambungkan kabel antena.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car, see diagram for speaker

connection.

Jika Anda telah memasang sistem speaker 3-arah di dalam mobil Anda, lihat diagram untuk

penyambungan speaker.

To subwoofer (see diagram

Ke subwoofer (lihat diagram

)

LINE IN

Antenna connector

Konektor antena

(see diagram / lihat diagram

)

15 A fuse

Sekring 15 A

Ignition switch

Saklar kontak

Black

Hitam

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Rear ground terminal

Terminal tanah belakang

Yellow*⁵

Kuning*⁵

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai mobil

(abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)

Fuse block

Blok sekring

Line out (see diagram

Keluaran (lihat diagram

)

Red

Merah

)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring

Blue

Biru

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

To external components (see diagram

Ke komponen luar (lihat diagram

)

Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)

)

Blue with white stripe

Biru dengan strip putih

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)

Orange with white stripe

Oranye dengan strip putih

Not supplied for this unit.

Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima.

To car light control switch

Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini

sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,

selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

Brown

Coklat

To cellular phone system

Ke sistem telepon selular

White with black stripe

Putih dengan strip hitam

White

Putih

Gray

Abu-abu

Green with black stripe

Hijau dengan strip

hitam

Green

Hijau

Purple with black stripe

Ungu dengan strip hitam

Purple

Ungu

Gray with black stripe

Abu-abu dengan strip

hitam

Left speaker (front)

Speaker kiri (depan)

Right speaker (front)

Speaker kanan (depan)

Left speaker (rear)

Speaker kiri (belakang)

Right speaker (rear)

Speaker kanan (belakang)

INDONESIA

ENGLISH

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.

• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat

dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.

• For amplifier only:

• Hanya untuk penguat saja:

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads

of this unit unused.

– Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.

Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.

– Anda dapat mematikan penguat yang terpasang tetap di dalam dan mengirim sinyal audio hanya ke

penguat eksternal untuk mendapatkan suara yang jelas dan mencegah bertambahnya panas di dalam

radio (lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

– Level jalur output dari alat penerima ini tetap tinggi untuk memelihara suara hi-fi yang telah di

hasilkan dari alat penerima ini.

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get

clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to

obtain the best performance from this unit.

Ketika menyambung sebuah penguat eksternal ke alat penerima ini, kecilkan kontrol gain pada

penguat eksternal untuk mendapatkan hasil terbaik dari alat penerima ini.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

Remote lead

Ujung jauh

To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Subwoofer

Rear speakers

Speaker-speaker

belakang

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Front speakers

Speaker-speaker depan

Front speakers

Speaker-speaker

depan

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel).

Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima

ini)

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

PEMECAHAN MASALAH

• Sekring meledak.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?

• Power cannot be turned on.

• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?

• No sound from the speakers.

• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?

• Sound is distorted.

• Suara terdistorsi.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek

dan tertebal?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

• Alat penerima menjadi panas.

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.

* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Penyambungan speaker untuk sistem speaker 3-arah

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system

(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

Anda dapat menikmati sebuah dunia dari “audio murni” dalam mobil Anda dengan menyambungkan

sistem speaker 3-arah (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-sedang/subwoofer).

IMPORTANT:

PENTING:

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following.

Jika Anda telah memasang sistem speaker 3-arah dalam mobil Anda, pastikan hal-hal

berikut:

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• Sambungkan sistem speaker, seperti diilustrasikan di bawah.

• Sebelum menggunakan sistem, aktifkan jaringan seberangan (crossover network) dan atur awal

frekuensi-frekuensi pancung yang tepat untuk HPF/LPF (khususnya untuk HPF); sebaliknya, hal

tersebut dapat merusak speaker-speaker.

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies

for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.

• Untuk lebih jelas mengenai pengaturan, lihat halaman 18 dan 19 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

Ketika menyambungkan speaker-speaker (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-sedang) melalui keluaran speaker

White

Putih

Gray

Abu-abu

Left high-range speaker

Speaker kiri cakupan-tinggi

Right high-range speaker

Speaker kanan cakupan-tinggi

Gray with black stripe

White with black stripe

Abu-abu dengan strip hitam

Putih dengan strip hitam

Green

Hijau

Purple

Ungu

Right mid-range speaker

Speaker kanan cakupan-sedang

Left mid-range speaker

Speaker kiri cakupan-sedang

Green with black stripe

Purple with black stripe

Hijau dengan strip hitam

Ungu dengan strip hitam

Connecting subwoofer / Menyambungkan subwoofer

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)

Remote lead

Ujung jauh

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

To subwoofer out

Ke keluaran subwoofer

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to

obtain more powerful sound

Ketika menyambungkan speaker-speaker (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-tengah) melalui penguat-

penguat eksternal—untuk memperoleh suara yang sangat kuat

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

To LINE OUT (REAR)

Ke LINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

Ke LINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Speaker kiri cakupan-tinggi

Right high-range speaker

Speaker kanan cakupan-tinggi

Left mid-range speaker

Speaker kiri cakupan-sedang

Right mid-range speaker

Speaker kanan cakupan-sedang

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel).

Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima

ini)

D ^{Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal}

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod® atau JVC D. player

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) Aturlah “Changer” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using

an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah.

iPod*⁵atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)—

KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).

CAUTION / PERINGATAN:

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)

atau

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)

JVC CD changer

CD changer JVC

CD changer jack

Konektor CD changer

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer anda

Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Aturlah “Ext In” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

External component

Komponen eksternal

CD changer jack

Konektor CD changer

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm

External component

Komponen eksternal

External component

Komponen eksternal

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Adapter Input Saluran KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk alat

penerima ini)

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Adapter Input AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima

ini)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

CD RECEIVER

KD-SH1000

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0365-005A

[UT]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card

first (see page 11).

Notice:

The display window built in this unit has

been produced with high precision, but

it may have some ineffective dots. This is

inevitable and is not malfunction.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

Getting started.................................

Press briefly.

Basic operations ...............................................

Radio operations ..............................

Disc/SD card/USB memory

Press repeatedly.

operations .................................... 11

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11

Playing from an SD card.................................... 11

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12

Press either

one.

Press A, then

Sound adjustments........................... 15

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16

Activating crossover network ........................... 18

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

General settings — PSM ................... 20

Title assignment .............................. 23

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24

Other external component operations... 26

Maintenance .................................... 26

More about this unit ......................... 27

Troubleshooting............................... 32

Specifications................................... 36

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Source operation display

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

3 • Control dial

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

(angle) button

p 0 (eject) button

q 4 /¢

w Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

buttons

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

Main elements and features

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For FM/AM: Changes the preset stations.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

Getting started

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 18) before turning on the power.

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

• For FM/AM: Selects the preset station if

pressed, or store a station if pressed and

held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = CD* = SD* = USB* =

CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player* (or EXT-IN)

= LINE-IN = (back to the beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Adjust the volume.

• For FM/AM: Searches for stations if

pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed

and held.

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Radio operations

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

20 – 22.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

3 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

DX indicator goes off and LO indicator

lights up.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength

will be detected.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

6 Select a preset number.

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

7 Store the station.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Continued on the next page

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

)

(

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 18) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

• To adjust the effect level

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

Continued on the next page

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

Activating BBE Digital

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

3 Select a sound mode.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

2 Select a frequency band.

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 18) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

connected speakers.

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

sound level.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

1 – 12 (0 – 23)

: See also page 8 for setting.

Hour adjustment

[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]

Clock M

00 – 59

: See also page 8 for setting.

Minute adjustment

[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours [Initial] : See also page 8 for setting.

Time display mode

• 24Hours

Scroll*¹

• Once [Initial]

• Auto

• Off

: Scrolls the track information once.

: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes

no effect.)

ID3 Tag

Tag display

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.

: Cancels.

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22

for setting.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*²

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,

External input

[24].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component, [26].

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

Selecting the graphic theme

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu. 1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

2 Select the size of the display.

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

3 Select the theme.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select a character.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to station frequencies,

CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer)

and the external components (LINE-IN and

EXT-IN).

3 Move to the next (or previous)

character position.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Station

frequencies

Up to 16 characters (up to 30

station frequencies including

bothe FM and AM)

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

CDs/CD-CH*

finish entering the title.

External

component

Up to 16 characters

4 Finish the procedure.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

• For available characters, see page 31.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To resume playback,

press it again.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 21.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Selecting a track from the menu

Selecting the playback modes

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

3 Select an item (see table below).

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

4 Finish the procedure.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

Repeat play

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

3 Confirm the selection.

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

24 and 25.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 15 – 19.)

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

To play new discs

Turning off the power

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

How to handle SD card

• During SSM search...

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

Continued on the next page

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will

be shown on the display.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

Windows Media Audio.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Continued on the next page

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

Sound adjustments

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to creates a being-

there feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name

Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before

assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vise versa.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press MENU

to go back to the operation screen of the

current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 20). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

• You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to

adjust it.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

General settings — PSM

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.

Accented letters: upper case

Numbers and symbols

Accented letters: lower case

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+02

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+04

+06

Hard Rock

R&B

+06

+04

+02

+06

+04

+02

+06

+02

+04

+02

–02

Pop

Jazz

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

+02

–04

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User 2

User 3

+02

+04

+02

+04

+02

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 26).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

installation.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 14).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 31).

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

24).

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Maximum Power

Output:

Continuous Power

Output (RMS):

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to

20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total

harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Signal to Noise Ratio:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

70 dB

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-In:

Line-Out:

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/65 dB

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection

System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16/32

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

Panel Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

1.7 kg (excluding accessories)

Mass (approx.):

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, CT

0206DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

ϰ༬ꢀ௥ો˿̱

GET0365-010A

[UT]

0206DTSMDTJEIN

EN, CT

ENGLISH

ˁ̂

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

ʹጅ෮̈́՟·

ޠڈ

ꢀ12 V é

࠸

๩ોϚ

ྑກԧ஁éϨ

઱

ԾቩԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ

࠱

ࡴ

ྐ

Ꮻ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚꢀJVCꢀԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé

WARNINGS

ᙲѿ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃

çᔃළྐЖ

࠷ڄ

๨çՓӕ

Љྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé

ëꢁϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ

Ϛሉ

ࡍ

๙ોгԿԾê

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

ٍิ!

Notes:

ëꢀӕۘᎳീӦಗ

ᖃ

࠷׆

ம

ڄࡩ

ۘᎳീéϨ

ۘᎳീ໩ગጛᖢçቁώꢀJVCꢀԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é

ëꢀ݈໯֜

໯ಙᑵ዇

ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ

ꢀ50 Wçմ

ꢀ4 Ω - 8 ΩéϨ

ఛʨ̷୊ʮ

ꢀ ꢀꢀ50 Wçቁቆओꢀ“Amp Gain”ꢀ௎

ࡩ׆

ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢéꢂ੉ኌ՟·ი

ए

୶ꢀ21ꢀ

ࡗ

éꢃ

ëꢀ

Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸уͶՠΈྐለ

ၷʪé

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear

and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change

“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

ëꢀʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ

࠱

᙮ညಞᇊ̕é

Heat sink

ಞᇊ̕

ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො!

ëꢁ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸ

ࡍ

๒ᖣê

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

ëꢀϚӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃

çᐓ

઱ԆԾʕ

ಙᑵ዇ለཔé

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

ϰ༬֝௥ો

ྒྷέ჋

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer

immediately.

ʓλྒάᎲʹጅಏաéࠜЉέщ᎝းçቁΘո

༿઱

ꢀJVC ԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ໩ኀੋé

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

ഢୢꢁ૆վ

ػࡒ

Sleeve

ࢭ

ጅೋ

Trim plate

༫ྟख

Power cord

ྐཔ௤૊·

਎ለӧ

Washer (ø5)

࿑੡ꢀ(ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

ᕬ

ᒘ͹ꢀ(M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

ႌ֣ᒘनꢀ(M5 × 20 mm)

Rubber cushion

ጁሗՎ኏࿑

Remote controller

ჲ૆዇

Battery

ྐЖ

Handles

଍

ӕ˾

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

ϰ༬ꢁꢂ༬௏éׇ֤ϛᄮ

ؼڸ

˗ꢃ

ڄࡒ

࿌༱

Εʄյ

ڄܓ

ϯ༫ദҺéϨ

઱Љ੕ᖅç

ᄔ

࠱

Љᘕ਎

ࢭ

˔ά

ཊऄçቁώꢀJVC

ԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋ

਎

ࢭ

˔άաᏻ˙͌༿੕é

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

ëꢀϨ

઱ʿ঻ᇧ

Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत

ӑிʆ

࢜

գϯ༫é

Do the required electrical connections.

නм

ᄔ

ྐཔ௤૊é

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Ҿᛮጅೋ

ߴڄ

дçӕ͙

ࢭ

ጅೋԕ֣Ϛᄭ

˖é

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

઱቎৹ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ

࠱

๑ᖢ

௰

ۘᎳീé

Fit the protrusions outside the unit.

અ

̳௰˜ϯ໯Ϛʹጅ͙௰é

։͵ጆ

Removing the unit

ֈʹጅ

çᏻઅʹጅ݈௰

֜௤૊௰˜ᖑළé

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

࿌

Εçઅղ̕

଍

ӕ˾಍ʈ̿

ᆥç೸݈ძᗌϙનղ਴ώ͙؁ղ̕ӕ

˾çʹጅᎲ˃؁̳é

When using the optional stay / ࠝ᎛Έ́ᆊ

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ࠝˀՠΈ͚

ࢮ

ጆೌϰ༬͵ጆ

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

̣ᕙΉ೻ꢀ(TOYOTA) ԆԾ

բ ꢀ࡛ζ֊̳ԆԾЂ

ࡖ

ጅç೸݈અʹጅ༫ʈմ

т໯é

Fire wall

Վ̑

Stay (option)

̀ᆉ

ꢀꢂ᎚·

ꢃ

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Not supplied for this unit.

ʿᎲʹጅಏաé

ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Dashboard

ᄭ

ػڷ

Bracket*³

ࣙ

*³

Screw (option)

ᒘീਐꢀꢂ᎚·

ꢃ

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Pocket

ೋ

Bracket*³

ࣙ

*³

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

: ӕʹጅϯ༫ϚЁ

ࣙ

ʕइçੀͫ՟·ꢀ8 mmꢀ

ڄۂ

ᒘീਐéϨ՟·ཫ

ڄۂ

ᒘീਐç๡๑ᖢʹጅé

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲

ꢀ30˚ꢀ

Դܾé

ٍิ

Caution when installing / ϰ༬ٍิ՗ො

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

અʹጅ·͗

ࡴ

༫ྟख֣

ռϯ༫

ࢭ

˖é

• ʿ

࠱

ᐅᏫ

ػࡒ

ă࿌ˀ

ఀᅬ௰˜Ąé

ྑཕ௥ો

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Typical connections / ն

څܔ

ોሉ̅٘

ોሉ

ꢁ!ꢁ̥அᐓ

ԆԾ˖

ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ

૊ለ๡዗

ࠓ

ʹጅᘷ

ࡌ

๑ᖢé

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

ྐʍለ

˺ለ֜ԾԽ

௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ

ʿψé

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 ՜ຖʓ࿌

Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ

ᖄи዗ለé

2ꢀઅ˭ለ

ྐለ௤૊৹գé

3ꢀఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ

಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car, see diagram for speaker

connection.

લϛԇԿϰ༬ʅʓ௣ಚᑶወԧ஁èቁ੉ኌ࿌

Љᘕಙᑵ዇௤૊é

To subwoofer (see diagram

૊вඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌

)

LINE IN

(see diagram / ੉ኌ࿌

Antenna connector

˭ለ௤૊዇

)

15 A fuse

15 AꢀۘᎳീ

Ignition switch

ᓭ̑ළᘕ

Black

෨и

To metallic body or chassis of the car

૊в

ᚙᝂ

ԆԾ

ᇟ

Rear ground terminal

ʹጅ݈

ࠌ

૊ϙၷʪ

Yellow*⁵

෦и*⁵

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖

ۈڄ

ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔

Ծ༫ྐЖ

௤૊

ꢂ·

अཔᓭ̑ළᘕꢃꢀꢂ

׆ݔ

ꢀ12 Vꢃ

Fuse block

ۘᎳീవ˔

Line out (see diagram

᎔̳ၷʪꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌

)

ꢃ

Red

߹и

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖

ۈڄ

ᚙၷʪ

Blue

ᕇи

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

To external components (see diagram

в͙૊இάꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌

)

૊вбੂ˭ለꢀꢂࠜЉ༫௎ꢃꢀꢂఛʨꢀ250 mAꢃ

)

Blue with white stripe

ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

௤૊вմ̧༫໯ʕ

ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢂఛʨꢀ200 mA ꢃ

Orange with white stripe

ዻиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

Not supplied for this unit.

ʿᎲʹጅಏաé

To car light control switch

௤૊вԆԾԾጜ૆վළᘕ

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ

ٜᐓ

ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é

Brown

ሶи

ꢀ

To cellular phone system

૊в˾ጅԦ஀

White with black stripe

ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

White

Ύи

Gray

Ни

Green with black stripe

ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Green

ႋи

Purple with black stripe

ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Purple

ാи

Gray with black stripe

НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Left speaker (front)

ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ

໯ꢃ

Right speaker (front)

͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ

໯ꢃ

Left speaker (rear)

ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢃ

Right speaker (rear)

͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢃ

ˁ̂

ENGLISH

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer ௥ો͚ો

ʩወ֝/

ච

ࡍ

ࡗ

ಚᑶወ

઱̣̈́௤૊

ʨ዇̣˥ঠ઱

ԆԾΘᝂᑵԦ஀é

•ꢀઅჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂꢀ֜մ̧༫໯ʕ

ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊৹գç̣

̣̈́௢ཫʹጅනмꢀ

ჲ૆é

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• For amplifier only:

• ෯բ̸ୋ

ʩወЪʶ!

– આಚᑶወ֝͵ጆᔄෆèκોʖ̸ୋ

ʩወêઆ͵ጆ

ಚᑶወોሉ

໰ˀΈê

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads

of this unit unused.

–

઱̣̈́ᘕ௻˖໯ᓼ

ࡖ

዇Փઅ

ࡖ

Ꮑ

༙͐

᎔৿в͙૊ᓼ

ࡖ

዇̣ᐺદଡಣ

ࡖڄ

ᛏ̣˪ᒼѠ૊Ђ዇

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get

clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to

obtain the best performance from this unit.

˖௰ᇊඹ႞ූă੉ኌ՟·ი

ए

୶ꢀ21ꢀ

ࡗ

Ąé

– ʹጅ

᎔̳ၷʪ̐ͦۘ

ਢ̣̐ͦۘॡਢܾ෭ॲ

ࡖ

ᛏं

ιЎ୕Άé

ꢀ ꢀ ະ௤૊͙௰̷୊

ʨ዇вʹጅइçቁᕢј͙௰̷୊

ʨ዇

ϯ੮

࠳

૆վ̣

ᐺ֊ʹጅ

ചಓ

ఛ՞ं

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Y-

௤૊዗ለꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

Remote lead

ჲ૆዗ለ

To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any

௤૊вմ̧༫໯ʕ

ჲ૆዗ለ

бੂ˭ለꢀꢁࠜЉ༫௎ꢂ

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂ

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

Subwoofer

ඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇

Rear speakers

݈໯ಙᑵ዇

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

Front speakers

໯ಙᑵ዇

Front speakers

໯ಙᑵ዇

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

અϙለႩ

ᚙԾᝂ

ږ׻

ԆԾ

ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵꢀꢁϨ

ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊ྐለ

çઅٛွս̓ꢂéϨ

ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

༙ྐងꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

ᄑ૜ਜ

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

• ۙᎴുጜᔄê

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* ᐓ

߹и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧ%

• Power cannot be turned on.

• ྑກˀ়ો௣ê

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* ᐓ

෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵ૊ʕ%

• No sound from the speakers.

• ಚᑶወԆЊᑶ

ࡗ

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* ᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵഠཔ%

• Sound is distorted.

• ᑶ

ࡗ

͜ॳê

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* ᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ

Ѵ૊ϙ%

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ᐓ

ಙᑵ዇

ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ

࠷ڄ

๨ꢀ(–)

Ѵθψ૊ϙ%

• Noise interfere with sounds.

• ዇

ࡗ

ʹᓿ

ࡗ

ᛐê

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

* ݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ

Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹

ྐለ௤૊%

• This unit becomes hot.

• ͵ጆഛᇋê

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ

Ѵ૊ϙ%

* ᐓ

ಙᑵ዇

ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ

࠷ڄ

๨ꢀ(–)

Ѵθψ૊ϙ%

• This unit does not work at all.

• ͵ጆҭθˀ়ይіê

* Have you reset your unit?

* ઱

Ѵʵ໩

ࡌ

໯઱

ጅஇ%

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / ʓ௣ಚᑶወԧ஁

ಚᑶወ௥ો

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system

(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

઱̣̈́௤૊ʒ௢ಙᑵ዇Ԧ஀ăਢ෋Ƅˀ෋Ƅඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇Ą̣

Ϛ઱

ԆԾՙ֌īঝଶ

ࡖڄ

ᛏĬ̛

ࡍ

࠲

IMPORTANT:

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following.

લϛԇԿϰ༬ʓ௣ಚᑶወԧ஁èቂᇨׇ̤ʔ౧ᓮê

•ꢀϨ಍࿌

Ε௤૊ಙᑵ዇Ԧ஀é

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• ՟·Ԧ஀˃

çζጒ

˜Ꮑႎു֜ྖζ௎

ቱະ

ꢀHPF/LPFă̈́·ఛਢᏁ୊Ƅ̈́·ఛјᏁ୊Ą

ꢀăॐѤ

ꢀHPFĄìѴ۱ç̈́͟঻๡๑ᖢಙᑵ዇é

• ੉ኌ՟·ი

ए

୶ꢀ18 ֜ꢀ19

ࡗ

Љᘕ௎໯

அ໢é

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for

HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

ັ௣ཬಚᑶወ᎕̴௥ોಚᑶወꢀĄਣ෌ƅˁ෌ą

White

Ύи

Gray

Ни

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

Gray with black stripe

White with black stripe

ͣਢ෋ಙᑵ዇

͆ਢ෋ಙᑵ዇

НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Green

ႋи

Purple

ാи

Right mid-range speaker

Left mid-range speaker

͆ˀ෋ಙᑵ዇

ͣˀ෋ಙᑵ዇

Green with black stripe

Purple with black stripe

ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Connecting subwoofer / ௥ોච

ࡍ

ࡗ

ಚᑶወ

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

ჲ૆዗ለăᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙĄ

Remote lead

ჲ૆዗ለ

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Yꢁ

௤૊዗ለăʿᎲʹጅಏաĄ

Subwoofer

ඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

To subwoofer out

௤૊вඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ

዇᎔̳

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to

obtain more powerful sound

ັ௣ཬ͚ોᓽ

ࡗ

ወ௥ોಚᑶወĄਣ෌ƅˁ෌ą— ̤ᐻધӧઢʩ

ࡗڅ

ᛐ

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

To LINE OUT (REAR)

௤૊вꢀLINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

௤૊вꢀLINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

ͣਢ෋ಙᑵ዇

͆ਢ෋ಙᑵ዇

Left mid-range speaker

Right mid-range speaker

ͣˀ෋ಙᑵ዇

͆ˀ෋ಙᑵ዇

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

અϙለႩ

ᚙԾᝂ

ږ׻

ԆԾ

ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵꢀꢂϨ

ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊ྐለ

çઅٛွս̓ꢃéϨ

ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

༙ྐងꢀꢂʿᎲʹጅಏաꢃ

D ^{Connecting the external components / ௥ોյ̨͚ોஈέ}

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CDꢀಘၫወéApple iPod®

ꢀJVC D. player

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“Changer” (ಘၫወ) (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ21

ࡘ

ê)

You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using

an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

઱̣̈́નʓ࿌

Ε௤૊௠՗இάé઱̣̈́՟·

ࡒߍ

ቱ਎዇ꢀꢁʿ਎కꢂꢀ—ꢀKS-PD100 (iPodꢀ·ꢂꢀ

ꢀ

KS-PD500ꢀꢁ*ꢃ playerꢀ·ꢂꢀ௤૊ꢀiPod*⁵

ꢀ*ꢃ playeré

CAUTION / ʯ˼:

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• ௤૊͙૊இά˃

çζᇧ

ʹጅʵ໩ᘕ௻é

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ

JVC CD changer

JVC CD ಘၫወ

CD changer jack

CDꢀಗၪ዇಍

ࣙ

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

઱

ꢀCD ಗၪ዇਎క

௤૊ྐង

iPod

ꢀApple Computer, Inc. ăᙧ

ྐ༃˙͌ĄϚ

ࠀ

੢˪մ̧੢

ࣁ

ٌ̰

ੋᆤé

Other external component / յ̨͚ોஈέ

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“Ext In” (͚௱᎕ʉ) (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ21

ࡘ

ê)

External component

͚ોஈέ

CD changer jack

CDꢀಗၪ዇಍

ࣙ

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

3.5 mm Θᝂᑵਁі಍

ࣙ

External component

͚ોஈέ

External component

͚ોஈέ

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

ྐཔ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U57 ꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

AUXꢀ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U58 (ʿᎲʹጅಏա)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

༙ྐងꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

CD RECEIVER

RECEPTEUR CD

KD-SH1000

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

GET0366-003A

[EX/EU]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card

first (see page 14).

Notice:

The display window built in this unit has

been produced with high precision, but

it may have some ineffective dots. This is

inevitable and is not malfunction.

Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and

European countries

For security reasons, a numbered ID card

is provided with this unit, and the same ID

number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the

authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 34 – 38).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

Getting started.................................

Press briefly.

Basic operations ...............................................

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

FM RDS operations............................ 11

Searching for your favorite FM RDS

programme ............................................... 11

Press either

one.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations .................................... 14

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 14

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 14

Playing from an SD card.................................... 14

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 15

Press A, then

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Sound adjustments........................... 18

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 18

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 19

Activating crossover network ........................... 21

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 21

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

General settings — PSM ................... 23

Title assignment .............................. 26

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 27

DAB tuner operations........................ 29

Other external component operations... 33

Maintenance .................................... 33

More about this unit ......................... 34

Troubleshooting............................... 38

Specifications................................... 42

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Text information display for

Source operation display

FM RDS stations and DAB services

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

9 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

button

3 • Control dial

p 0 (eject) / (angle) button

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

q 4 /¢

buttons

w Remote sensor

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel

remote control function.

• See the Installation/Connection Manual

(separate volume) for connection.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

Main elements and features

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

Getting started

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For DAB: Changes the service.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 21) before turning on the power.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

• For FM/AM/DAB: Selects the preset

station (or service) if pressed, or store a

station (or a service) if pressed and held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = DAB* = CD* = SD* =

USB* = CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player*

(or EXT-IN) = LINE-IN = (back to the

beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

• For FM/AM/DAB: Searches for stations

(or ensembles) if pressed, or skips

frequencies after pressed and held.

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

Continued on the next page

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Radio operations

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

23 – 26.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

3 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

DX indicator goes off and LO indicator

lights up.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength

will be detected.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

6 Select a preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

5 Select a preset number.

7 Store the station.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

Select a PTY code.

FM RDS operations

What you can do with RDS

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations

to send an additional signal along with their

regular programme signals.

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the

following:

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the

following)

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY

Standby Receptions (see pages 12 and 24)

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13)

• Programme Search (see page 13)

• Receiving the message service—RDS

Radiotext (RT) (see page 13)

• You can select one of the PTY codes

(including the six preset codes which

can be presetted as you like, see the

following).

Start searching for your favorite

programme.

If there is a station broadcasting a

programme of the same PTY code as you

have selected, that station is tuned in.

Searching for your favorite

FM RDS programme

You can search for your favorite programmes

being broadcast by selecting the PTY code of

your favorite programmes.

Storing your favorite programme

types

You can store your favorite PTY codes into the

PTY Preset List.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

2 Select a PTY code.

3 Enter the preset list.

PTY Preset List appears.

Pop M

Rock M

Easy M

Classics

Affairs

Varied

4 Select a preset number.

Continued on the next page

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

5 Store the setting.

The TP indicator goes off.

PTY Standby Reception

6 To store other PTY codes into other

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to

switch temporarily to your favorite PTY

programme from any source other than AM.

• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception

also works to search for a DAB service.

preset numbers.

Repeat steps 2 to 5.

7 Finish the procedure.

To select your favorite PTY code for PTY

Standby Reception, see page 24.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

To activate the PTY Standby Reception

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)

from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level if the current level is lower than the preset

level (see page 24).

3 Select one of the PTY codes.

• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception

also works to search for a DAB service

broadcasting Traffic Announcement.

4 Finish the procedure.

To activate TA Standby Reception

The PTY indicator either lights

up or flashes.

The TP (Traffic Programme)

indicator either lights up or

flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY

Standby Reception is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby

Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune

in to another station providing these

signals. The PTY indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby

Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs

when you are listening to an FM station

without the RDS signals required for TA

Standby Reception.)

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in

to another station (or DAB service) providing

the related signals. The TP indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select “Off” in step 3. The PTY indicator goes

off.

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

Using the message service—

RDS Radiotext (RT)

When driving in an area where FM reception

is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically

tunes in to another FM RDS station of the

same network, possibly broadcasting the same

programme with stronger signals (see the

illustration below).

What is RDS Radiotext

RDS Radiotext is part of the RDS data signal

to transmit various text information (e.g.

programme information, phone numbers,

e-mail and web addresses, artist/title

information, and news headlines). The text

service is part of the RDS broadcast.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

One message may contain up to 64 characters.

The message service is an optional service and is

not supported by all broadcasters.

Once you tuned in to a station that supports

the message service, the service is automatically

received.

To show the RDS Radiotext (RT) information

While listening to a station that supports RT...

When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-Reg” on page 24.

Radiotext screen appears on

the display.

• The Radiotext screen will be temporarily

canceled when you operate the unit.

Automatic station selection—

Programme Search

It takes time to load data. While loading,

“Loading” and progress indications appear.

• You can see approximate loading percentage

with the indications.

Usually when you press the number buttons,

the preset station is tuned in.

If the signals from the FM RDS preset station

are not sufficient for good reception, this unit,

using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency

broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset station is broadcasting.

• The unit takes some time to tune in to

another station using programme search.

• See also page 24.

If text message is unavailable, the text screen

will change to source operation screen. Yet,

when text message becomes available later, the

text screen will automatically appear.

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 / button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 25), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

Continued on the next page

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

)

(

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 21) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

• To adjust the effect level

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

Activating BBE Digital

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

3 Select a sound mode.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

2 Select a frequency band.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 21) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

connected speakers.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

speakers (slope).

sound level.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

Hour adjustment

0 – 23 (1 – 12)

[Initial: 0 (0:00)]

: See also page 8 for setting.

Clock M

Minute adjustment

00 – 59

[Initial: 00 (0:00)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours

Time display mode

• 24Hours [Initial]

CLK Adj

• Auto [Initial]

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock

Clock adjustment

time) data in the RDS signal.

: Cancels.

• Off

Scroll*¹

• Once [Initial]

: For track information: scrolls the track information once.

For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.

For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.

• Auto

: For track information: repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in

between).

For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.

For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.

• Off

: For track information: cancels.

For RDS Radiotext: shows only the first page of the text message.

For DAB text: shows only headline if any.

Continued on the next page

Indications

Dimmer

Items

Settings, [reference page]

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 25 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4” takes

no effect.)

ID3 Tag

Tag display

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.

: Cancels.

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 26

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 26

for setting.

PTY Stby

29 PTY codes (see : Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [12].

PTY standby

page 11)

[Initial: News]

AF-Reg

• AF [Initial]

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station or service (the programme may differ

from the one currently received), [13, 31].

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.

: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “ON”).

Alternate frequency/

Regionalization

reception

• AF Reg

• Off

TA Vol

0 – 30 or 50*²

: When a traffic programme (TA) is received, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level.

Traffic announcement [Initial: 15]

volume

P-Search

Programme search

• On

• Off [Initial]

: Activates Programme Search, [13].

: Cancels.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

DAB AF*³

• On [Initial]

: Traces the programme among DAB services and FM RDS stations,

Alternative Frequency

Reception

[31].

• The AF indicator lights up.

: Cancels.

• Off

Announce*³

9 announcement : Select one of the announcement types for Announcement Standby

Announcement

Standby Reception

types (see page 31) Reception.

[Initial: Travel]

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*⁴

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,

External input

[27].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component, [32]

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM

menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

4 Finish the procedure.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

Selecting the graphic theme

Title assignment

You can assign titles to CDs (both in this

unit and in the CD changer) and the external

components (LINE-IN and EXT-IN).

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select the size of the display.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

CDs/CD-CH*

External

Up to 16 characters

component

3 Select the theme.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

2 Select a character.

3 Move to the next (or previous)

iPod®/D. player operations

character position.

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z,

a – z), the following characters will be used.

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 25.

Accented letters: upper case

Accented letters: lower case

Numbers and symbols

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Continued on the next page

⁄

Adjust the volume.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

To resume playback,

press it again.

2 Select the desired menu.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod:

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

For iPod

For D. player

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Selecting the playback modes

DAB tuner operations

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver

digital quality sound without any annoying

interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,

it can carry text, pictures, and data. When

transmitting, DAB combines several

2 Select one of the playback modes.

programmes (called “services”) to form one

“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called

“primary service”—can also be divided into its

components (called “secondary service”). A

typical ensemble has six or more programmes

(services) broadcast at the same time.

3 Select an item (see table below).

4 Finish the procedure.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do

the following:

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Alternative Frequency Reception (see

“DAB AF” on page 24).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner

KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have

another DAB tuner, consult your JVC

IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for

your DAB tuner.

Repeat play

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

Start searching for an ensemble.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

When an ensemble is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

Continued on the next page

4 Finish the procedure.

⁄

Select a service (either primary or

secondary) to listen to.

• The DRC indicator will be highlighted

only when receiving DRC signals from the

tuned service.

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !...

To search for your favorite service

You can search for either Dynamic or Static

PTY codes.

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on pages 11 and 12 for FM RDS stations.

• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the

DAB tuner and the FM tuner.

2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.

• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner

only.

When surrounding sounds are noisy

Storing DAB services in memory

Some service provides Dynamic Range Control

(DRC) signals together with their regular

programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low

level sounds to improve for your listening.

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for

each band.

1 Select a service you want.

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

3 Select “List.”

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “DRC.”

3 Select one of the DRC signal levels (1,

2, or 3).

4 Select a preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other

DAB bands, but cannot store a service for

the other bands.

The reinforcement level increases from 1

to 3.

5 Store the service.

Using the Standby Receptions

TA (Road Traffic News) Standby

Reception

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on page 11 for FM RDS stations.

• You cannot activate TA Standby Reception

separately for the DAB tuner and for FM

tuner.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a service you want to

preset...

• The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level (see page 24).

PTY Standby Reception

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on page 11 for FM RDS stations.

• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works

only using a dynamic PTY code.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

• You can neither store your favorite PTY nor

activate PTY Standby Reception separately for

the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.

• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby

Reception when the source is either “FM” or

“DAB.”

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

3 Select “List.”

Announcement Standby Reception

Announcement Standby Reception allows the

unit to switch temporarily to your favorite

service (announcement type).

4 Select a preset number.

To select your favorite announcement type,

see page 24.

Announcement types

Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Special, Rad Inf

(Radio Information), Sports, Finance

• You can move to the lists of the other

DAB bands by turning the control dial.

To activate the Announcement Standby

Reception

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “Announce.”

Continued on the next page

When shipped from the factory, Alternative

Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency

Reception, see page 24.

3 Select an announce type.

To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS)

information

4 Finish the procedure.

• If the ANN indicator lights up,

Announcement Standby Reception is

activated.

• If the ANN indicator flashes,

Announcement Standby Reception is not

yet activated.

To activate, tune in to another service

providing these signals. The ANN

indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

Lights up when receiving a

service providing DLS.

To deactivate the Announcement Standby

Reception

Select “Off” in step 3 above.

• The ANN indicator goes off.

Tracing the same programme—

Alternative Frequency Reception

You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency

Reception.

• While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

cannot be received, this unit automatically

tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS

station, broadcasting the same programme.

• While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit

automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Back to the beginning

• The DLS screen will be temporarily canceled

when you operate the unit.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 14 – 17; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

27 – 29.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 25

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

Continued on the next page

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

Turning off the power

To play new discs

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

How to handle SD card

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

FM RDS operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires

two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative

Frequency) to work correctly. Without

receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by

TA Standby Reception, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level (TA

VOL) if the current level is lower than the

preset level.

Stick-on label

• When Alternative Frequency Reception

is activated (with AF selected), Network-

Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network-

Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated

without deactivating Alternative Frequency

Reception. (See page 24.)

• Message service requires the RDS Radiotext

signal. It is available on most major stations.

If reception is weak, the service may become

unavailable. For any questions regarding the

content of this service, please contact your

broadcaster.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit

«http://www.rds.org.uk».

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 26), it will

be shown on the display.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 25) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

Continued on the next page

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Sound adjustments

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

discs, “Name Full” appears. Delete unwanted

titles before assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vise versa.

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to creates a being-

there feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 23). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press

MENU to go back to the operation screen

of the current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

Notice:

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

•

You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust

it.

General settings — PSM

DAB tuner operations

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

• Only primary DAB services can be presetted

even when you store a secondary service.

• A previously preset DAB service is erased

when a new DAB service is stored in the same

preset number.

Continued on the next page

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+0200

+02+04

Hard

R&B

Pop

Jazz

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User

Rock

+02

+06

+04

+0200

+06

+04

+02 00

+02+02+02+02+02+06

+0200

+02+02+02+06

+02+02+02+04

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

–04

–0200

+02+02

+02+04

+06

+02+04

+04

+02+04

+04

+0200

200

User 3

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 33).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “No Text” appears on the display.

installation.

Store stations manually.

Connect the aerial firmly.

The station does not support RDS RT or the reception is

weak.

Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).

• “Loading” does not disappear.

The receiving signal is temporarily too weak to receive a

complete message although the service is available.

Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).

Symptoms

• Disc cannot be played back.

Remedies/Causes

Insert the disc correctly.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 17).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 26).

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

• Noise is generated.

Remedies/Causes

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 26).

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 21).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

28).

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• “No DAB Signal” appears on the display.

• “Reset 08” appears on the display.

Search for another ensemble.

Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and reset the

unit (see page 2).

• The DAB tuner does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the display. Check the DAB aerial and its connections.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Maximum Power

Output:

Continuous Power

Output (RMS):

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to

20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total

harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Signal to Noise Ratio:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

70 dB

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-In:

Line-Out:

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

(MW)

(LW)

522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

144 kHz to 279 kHz

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

Sensitivity:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

20 μV/65 dB

50 μV

MW Tuner

LW Tuner

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

MP3:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

32 kbps – 320 kbps

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16/32

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

Panel Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

1.7 kg (excluding accessories)

Mass (approx.):

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de

fonctionnement?

Réinitialisez votre appareil

Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

EN, FR

0106DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

Manuel d’installation/raccordement

GET0366-010A

[EX/EU]

0106DTSMDTJEIN

EN, FR

ENGLISH

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle

does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.

Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez

acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

WARNINGS

AVERTISSEMENTS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la

voiture après l’installation.

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR Remarques:

ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur

d’autoradios JVC.

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière

et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est

inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 25 du

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear

and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change

“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande

isolante.

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet

appareil.

Heat sink

Dissipateur de chaleur

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,

will be seriously damaged.

l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des

enceintes de votre voiture.

Parts list for installation and connection

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur

autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Etui de transport/Panneau

de commande

Sleeve

Manchon

Trim plate

Plaque d’assemblage

Power cord

Cordon d’alimentation

Washer (ø5)

Rondelle (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)

Rubber cushion

Amortisseur en caoutchouc

Remote controller

Télécommande

Battery

Pile

Handles

Poignées

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie

kits.

d’approvisionnement.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien

qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Tordez les languettes appropriées pour

maintenir le manchon en place.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.

Fit the protrusions outside the unit.

Fixez les protubérances à l’extérieur de l’appareil.

Removing the unit

Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez

de la façon illustrée de façon à retirer

l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du

hauban en option

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil

scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.

Fire wall

Cloison

Stay (option)

Hauban (en option)

Not supplied for this unit.

Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Dashboard

Tableau de bord

Bracket*³

Support*³

Screw (option)

Vis (en option)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Pocket

Poche

Bracket*³

Support*³

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.

Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

Caution when installing / Précautions lors de l’installation

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

Fixez l’appareil sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.

• NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

If your car is equipped with the ISO

connector / Si votre voiture est équippée

d’un connecteur ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel

(Vauxhall)

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.

• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.

Original wiring / Câblage original

Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1

From the car body

De la carrosserie de la

voiture

ISO connector

Connecteur ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation

fourni

Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2

Y: Yellow

R: Red

Rouge

* Choke coil

* Bobine d’arrêt

Jaune

View from the lead side

Vue à partir du côté des fils

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion

incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car, see diagram for speaker

connection.

Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à 3 voies, référez-vous au diagramme pour la

connexion des enceintes.

LINE IN

(see diagram / voir le diagramme

)

To subwoofer (see diagram

)

Au caisson de grave

(voir le diagramme

To steering wheel remote controller

)

(see diagram

Pour la télécommande de volant

(voir le diagramme

)

Aerial

15 A fuse

connector

Connecteur

d’antenne

Fusible 15 A

Ignition switch

Interrupteur d’allumage

Black

Noir

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Rear ground terminal

Borne arrière de masse

Yellow *⁵

Jaune *⁵

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing

the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture

(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Line out (see diagram

)

Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme

)

Fuse block

Porte-fusible

Red

Rouge

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

To external components (see diagram

Au appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme

)

Blue with white stripe

Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

(200 mA max.)

Not supplied for this unit.

Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Orange with white stripe

Orange avec bande blanche

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant

installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut

pas être mis sous tension.

To car light control switch

À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture

Brown

Marron

To cellular phone system

À un système de téléphone cellulaire

White with black stripe

Blanc avec bande noire

White

Blanc

Gray with black stripe

Gris avec bande noire

Gray

Gris

Green with black stripe

Vert avec bande noire

Green

Vert

Purple with black stripe

Violet avec bande noire

Purple

Violet

Left speaker (front)

Enceinte gauche (avant)

Right speaker (front)

Enceinte droit (avant)

Left speaker (rear)

Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Right speaker (rear)

Enceinte droit (arrière)

FRANÇAIS

ENGLISH

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the

controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.

Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en

utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)

correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.

OE remote adapter (not supplied)

Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)

Steering wheel remote input

Entrée de la télécommande de volant

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou caisson de grave

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système stéréo.

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de

l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.

• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:

• For amplifier only:

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads

of this unit unused.

– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils

d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get

clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to

obtain the best performance from this unit.

– Vous pouvez désactiver l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio uniquement à un ou plusieurs

amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et pour éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil (voir

page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi

pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.

Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain sur

l’amplificateur extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.

Remote lead

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

JVC Amplifier

Subwoofer

JVC Amplificateur

Caisson de grave

Rear speakers

Enceintes arrière

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

Rear speakers

Enceintes arrière

Front speakers

Enceintes avant

Front speakers (see diagram

Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme

)

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated

with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause

damage to the unit.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est

pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).

L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector

and connect them to the amplifier.

Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO

de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• Le fusible saute.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.

• Pas de son des enceintes.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.

• Le son est déformé.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

• Interférence avec les sons.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• This unit becomes hot.

• L’appareil devient chaud.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?

• This unit does not work at all.

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Have you reset your unit?

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Connexion des enceintes pour un système d’enceintes à 3 voies

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system

(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

Vous pouvez recréer un monde de “son pur” dans votre voiture en connectant un système d’enceintes à trois

voies (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences/extrêmes graves).

IMPORTANT:

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following.

Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à trois voies dans votre voiture, assurez-vous

de ce qui suit.

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• Connectez le système d’enceintes comme montré ci-dessous.

• Avant d’utiliser le système, mettez en service le réseau de transition et préréglez les fréquences de

coupure appropriées pour HPF/LPF (plus spécialement pour HPF); sinon, les enceintes risqueraient

d’être endommagées.

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for

HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 21 and 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.

• Pour en savoir plus sur les réglages, référez-vous aux pages 21 et 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) aux sorties d’enceinte

White

Blanc

Gray

Gris

Left high-range speaker

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche

Right high-range speaker

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit

Gray with black stripe

Gris avec bande noire

White with black stripe

Blanc avec bande noire

Green

Vert

Purple

Violet

Right mid-range speaker

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences

droit

Left mid-range speaker

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche

Green with black stripe

Vert avec bande noire

Purple with black stripe

Violet avec bande noire

Connecting subwoofer / Connexion du haut-parleur d’extrêmes graves

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

Remote lead

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

To subwoofer out

À la sortie du caisson

de grave

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to

obtain more powerful sound

Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) à travers des

amplificateurs extérieurs—pour obtenir un son plus puissant

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

To LINE OUT (REAR)

À LINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

À LINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences

Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit

gauche

Left mid-range speaker

Right mid-range speaker

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences

Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit

gauche

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord

la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

F ^{Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs}

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod‚ Apple® ou lecteur D. JVC

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) Choisissez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Référez-vous à la page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*⁶or D. player can be

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration. Le iPod*⁶ou le lecteur

connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player). D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou

KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).

CAUTION / PRECAUTION:

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

JVC CD changer

Changeur CD JVC

JVC DAB tuner

Tuner DAB JVC

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

JVC DAB tuner

Tuner DAB JVC

JVC CD changer

Changeur CD JVC

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou tuner DAB

Other external component / Autre appareil extérieur

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Choisissez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Référez-vous à la page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

Appareil extérieur

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

External component

Appareil extérieur

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm

External component

Appareil extérieur

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

CD RECEIVER

CD-RECEIVER

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

KD-SH1000

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 8.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

INSTRUCTIONS

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0366-006A

[EY]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card

first (see page 14).

Notice:

The display window built in this unit has

been produced with high precision, but

it may have some ineffective dots. This is

inevitable and is not malfunction.

For security reasons, a numbered ID card

is provided with this unit, and the same ID

number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the

authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 34 – 38).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK300............

Getting started.................................

Press briefly.

Basic operations ...............................................

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

FM RDS operations............................ 11

Searching for your favorite FM RDS

programme ............................................... 11

Press either

one.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations .................................... 14

Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 14

Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 14

Playing from an SD card.................................... 14

Playing from a USB memory ............................. 15

Press A, then

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Sound adjustments........................... 18

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 18

Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 19

Activating crossover network ........................... 21

Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 21

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: SD player operations.

General settings — PSM ................... 23

Title assignment .............................. 26

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 27

DAB tuner operations........................ 29

Other external component operations... 33

Maintenance .................................... 33

More about this unit ......................... 34

Troubleshooting............................... 38

Specifications................................... 42

: External USB memory operations.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Detaching...

How to enter the various menus

The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,

PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).

• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds,

menu screen is canceled.

2 Select a menu you want.

Time countdown indicator

Attaching...

3 Enter the selected menu.

• To go back to the previous screen or

exit the MENU screen, press BACK

repeatedly.

How to change the control panel

angle

4 Operate as instructed on the screen.

• To go back to the MENU screen, press

MENU.

When using the remote controller

Caution:

How to change the display information and patterns

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Text information display for

Source operation display

FM RDS stations and DAB services

Clock time display

Large graphic display (full display size)

Small graphic display

Control panel

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2 SOURCE button

9 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

button

3 • Control dial

p 0 (eject) / (angle) button

• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER

button

q 4 /¢

buttons

w Remote sensor

4 MENU button

5 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

6 Display window

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

e BACK button

7 DISP (display) button

8 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal

r Reset button

(control panel release) button

Remote controller —

RM-RK300

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

Caution:

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel

remote control function.

• See the Installation/Connection Manual

(separate volume) for connection.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

Main elements and features

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SOURCE button

Selects the source.

Getting started

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

• For DAB: Changes the service.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Changes the

folders.

Activates or deactivates crossover network

(see page 21) before turning on the power.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5.

(Now 5/∞/4/¢ work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Basic operations

Turn on the power.

4 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

Adjusts the volume level.

5 Number buttons

• For FM/AM/DAB: Selects the preset

station (or service) if pressed, or store a

station (or a service) if pressed and held.

• For CD/CD Text: Selects the tracks.

• For MP3/WMA/SD/USB: Selects the

folders.

FM/AM = DAB* = CD* = SD* =

USB* = CD-CH*/iPod*/D. player*

(or EXT-IN) = LINE-IN = (back to the

beginning)

• For CD changer: Selects the discs.

6 ANGLE button

Adjusts the control panel angle.

7 BAND button

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Selects the band.

8 4 / ¢ buttons

• For FM/AM/DAB: Searches for stations

(or ensembles) if pressed, or skips

frequencies after pressed and held.

• For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

Changes the tracks if pressed, or fast-

forwards or reverses the track if pressed

and held.

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

* 5 : Returns to the previous menu.

∞ : Confirms the selection.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

Continued on the next page

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Radio operations

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Start searching for a station.

Selected band appears.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

23 – 26.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “Demo,” then “Off.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the

hour.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust

the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or

“12Hours.”

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard

to receive

3 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To check the current clock time while the

power is turned off

MO indicator lights up.

Reception improves, but stereo

effect will be lost.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure and select “Off” in step 3. The MO

indicator goes off.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

Tuning in to FM stations with strong

signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-

Extreme)

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

DX indicator goes off and LO indicator

lights up.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength

will be detected.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

number 4 of the FM1 band.

To tune in to all receivable stations, repeat the

same procedure and select “DX” in step 3. The

LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights

up.

3 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

• If you hold down 5/∞, the Preset Station

List appears (go to step 6).

Continued on the next page

Listening to a preset station

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

6 Select a preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

5 Select a preset number.

7 Store the station.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by turning the control dial.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a station you want to

preset...

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

Select a PTY code.

FM RDS operations

What you can do with RDS

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations

to send an additional signal along with their

regular programme signals.

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the

following:

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the

following)

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY

Standby Receptions (see pages 12 and 24)

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13)

• Programme Search (see page 13)

• Receiving the message service—RDS

Radiotext (RT) (see page 13)

• You can select one of the PTY codes

(including the six preset codes which

can be presetted as you like, see the

following).

Start searching for your favorite

programme.

If there is a station broadcasting a

programme of the same PTY code as you

have selected, that station is tuned in.

Searching for your favorite

FM RDS programme

You can search for your favorite programmes

being broadcast by selecting the PTY code of

your favorite programmes.

Storing your favorite programme

types

You can store your favorite PTY codes into the

PTY Preset List.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

2 Select a PTY code.

3 Enter the preset list.

PTY Preset List appears.

Pop M

Rock M

Easy M

Classics

Affairs

Varied

4 Select a preset number.

Continued on the next page

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

5 Store the setting.

The TP indicator goes off.

PTY Standby Reception

6 To store other PTY codes into other

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to

switch temporarily to your favorite PTY

programme from any source other than AM.

• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception

also works to search for a DAB service.

preset numbers.

Repeat steps 2 to 5.

7 Finish the procedure.

To select your favorite PTY code for PTY

Standby Reception, see page 24.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

To activate the PTY Standby Reception

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)

from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level if the current level is lower than the preset

level (see page 24).

3 Select one of the PTY codes.

• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception

also works to search for a DAB service

broadcasting Traffic Announcement.

4 Finish the procedure.

To activate TA Standby Reception

The PTY indicator either lights

up or flashes.

The TP (Traffic Programme)

indicator either lights up or

flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY

Standby Reception is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby

Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune

in to another station providing these

signals. The PTY indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby

Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs

when you are listening to an FM station

without the RDS signals required for TA

Standby Reception.)

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in

to another station (or DAB service) providing

the related signals. The TP indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select “Off” in step 3. The PTY indicator goes

off.

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

Using the message service—

RDS Radiotext (RT)

When driving in an area where FM reception

is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically

tunes in to another FM RDS station of the

same network, possibly broadcasting the same

programme with stronger signals (see the

illustration below).

What is RDS Radiotext

RDS Radiotext is part of the RDS data signal

to transmit various text information (e.g.

programme information, phone numbers,

e-mail and web addresses, artist/title

information, and news headlines). The text

service is part of the RDS broadcast.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

One message may contain up to 64 characters.

The message service is an optional service and is

not supported by all broadcasters.

Once you tuned in to a station that supports

the message service, the service is automatically

received.

To show the RDS Radiotext (RT) information

While listening to a station that supports RT...

When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-Reg” on page 24.

Radiotext screen appears on

the display.

• The Radiotext screen will be temporarily

canceled when you operate the unit.

Automatic station selection—

Programme Search

It takes time to load data. While loading,

“Loading” and progress indications appear.

• You can see approximate loading percentage

with the indications.

Usually when you press the number buttons,

the preset station is tuned in.

If the signals from the FM RDS preset station

are not sufficient for good reception, this unit,

using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency

broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset station is broadcasting.

• The unit takes some time to tune in to

another station using programme search.

• See also page 24.

If text message is unavailable, the text screen

will change to source operation screen. Yet,

when text message becomes available later, the

text screen will automatically appear.

Playing from an SD card

Before detaching the control panel, turn off the

power.

Disc/SD card/USB memory

operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

SD loading slot

To stop play and eject the disc

Note:

If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you

cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB”

flashes on the display. If this happens, detach

the USB memory, then, press 0 / button

again.

SD card

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

Press in the SD card until you hear a

clicking sound.

To eject the SD card, press the SD card

again.

• Press the SD card softly (do not release

your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD

card may pop out from the unit.

* If you have changed the external input setting

to “Ext In” (see page 25), you cannot select the

CD changer.

Cautions:

⁄

Attach the control panel.

• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory

when it might hinder your safety driving.

• Make sure all important data have been

backed up to avoid losing the data.

If an SD card or USB memory has been

attached...

• The control panel goes

back to the previous

position.

Playback starts automatically if tracks are

recorded.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different SD card or USB memory is

currently attached, playback starts from the

beginning.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a

USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Removing the USB memory will also stop

playback.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect MP3-incompatible

CD changers. However, these units are not

compatible with MP3 discs.

• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and

KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

USB input terminal

To fast-forward or reverse the track

USB memory

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it

out from the unit.

Continued on the next page

To go to the next or previous tracks

4 Confirm the selection.

The selected list appears on the display.

• You can move to the other list by turning

the control dial.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3/WMA/SD/USB)

For MP3 tracks:

5 Select a disc/folder/file from the list.

Current folder

For WMA tracks:

Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step 3

Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:

If you select the current disc/folder

(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File

List appears.

• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List

(

) and Folder List (

), see the following.

6 Starts playback.

Other main functions

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

When using the remote controller

• To directly select a disc (

)

• To directly select a track of an audio CD or

a CD Text (

• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder

• This function is not available for an audio CD

or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”

)

(

)

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

To select a number from 1 – 6:

3 Select a list type.

To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):

Selectable only when the source is

“CD-CH.”

Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.

For MP3/WMA folders:

It is required that folders are assigned with

2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

Intro

Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...

Track

: All tracks of the current playback

media. [

]

Folder*¹: First track of all folders of the

current playback media. [

: First track of all the inserted discs.

]

Disc*²

[

]

2 After making sure “No Eject?” is

Off

: Cancels.

selected...

Repeat

Track

Plays repeatedly

• “No Eject” flashes, and the

disc cannot be ejected.

: The current track. [

]

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder.

[

]

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is

selected.

Disc*²

: All tracks of the inserted discs.

[

: Cancels.

]

Off

• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.

Random Plays at random

Folder*¹: All tracks of the current folder, then

Selecting the playback modes

tracks of the next folder and so on.

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

[

]

Disc

: All tracks of the current disc.

[

]

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

All*³

: All tracks of the inserted discs/

media. [

: Cancels.

]

2 Select one of the playback modes.

Off

Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/

USB).

Only when the source is CD-CH.

Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.

3 Select one of the items (see the

following table).

4 Finish the procedure.

To make more precise settings, see the

following.

Sound adjustments

To cancel the acoustic effect, select “Defeat” in

step Ÿ.

Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)

You can create a more acoustic sound field such

as in a theater, hall, etc.

Precise settings for the DSP modes

• When crossover network (see page 21) is

activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”

1 Select a DSP mode.

2 Select the number of the built-in

speakers.

DSP modes

• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker

number is fixed to “4ch.”

Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,

Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the

vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—

Karaoke.)

Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).

Select one of the DSP modes.

3 Select your listening seat position.

• To finish the procedure

4 Select the speaker to be adjusted.

• To adjust the effect level

Go to step !.

For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect

level is not adjustable.

Adjust the effect level.

* Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step

• To finish the procedure

5 Select the distance between the

3 Finish the procedure.

selected speaker and the seat.

Using the equalizer—EQ

You can adjust the sound equalization patterns

to your preference by using either Graphic EQ

or Parametric EQ.

Once you have set the distance, it is

memorized for each seat position selected

in step 3. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select the seat position.

• Adjust the equalizer to match the

reproducible frequency range of the

connected speakers; otherwise, the

adjustments may not be effective.

To change the measuring unit

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the

Selecting preset sound modes—

Graphic EQ

distance for the other speakers.

7 Finish the procedure.

Sound modes

Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B

(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,

Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3

Activating BBE Digital

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

BBE Digital is a digital processing method to

restore the brilliance and clarity of the original

live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When

a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces

frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing

high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach

the ear than low frequency sounds.

BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship

between the low, mid, and high frequencies by

adding a progressively longer delay time to the

low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies

reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A

more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.

3 Select a sound mode.

4 Finish the procedure.

1 Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).

2 Select the effect level.

3 Select a band.

Storing your own sound modes

1 Select a sound mode.

2 Select a frequency band.

Band1 : 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz

Band2 : 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz

Band3 : 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz

4 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected band.

3 Adjust the enhanced level for the

selected frequency band.

5 Select the frequency.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other frequency bands.

• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at

least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each

other. (Only selectable frequencies are

shown on the display.)

6 Select one of the user modes.

6 Select the band width (Q).

7 Store the adjustments.

• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.

Then repeat steps 3 to 6.

7 Finish the procedure.

Adjusting Parametric EQ

1 Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).

Once you have made adjustments, it is

memorized. The memorized setting is recalled

next time you select Parametric EQ.

To cancel Crossover, repeat the same

procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?”

appears on the display.

Activating crossover network

By activating crossover network, you can

allocate different frequency range of sound

signals to different speakers to match their

characteristic.

•

indicator goes off.

Setting the sound modes—SEL

If you have installed the 3-way network

speaker system in the car, make sure of the

following:

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

• Before using the system, activate crossover

network and preset the appropriate cutoff

frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially

for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the

speakers.

Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).

Select a setting item.

• For 3-way network speaker system, see

Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume).

* Appears only when crossover network is

activated (see left column).

You cannot perform other operations until you

finish the following procedure.

When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or

“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER

to enter its submenu.

While the power is turned off...

⁄

Adjust the selected setting item.

(See the following for details.)

• To adjust other SEL settings, press

BACK. Then repeat steps Ÿ and !.

Finish the procedure.

To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal

•

Fad (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

• To cancel the procedure, press and

hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power

turns off.

Bal (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

•

indicator

lights up (in sequence

with other indicators).

To adjust reproduced frequency

level—X-Over

To adjust subwoofer output—

S.woofer

This setting is available only when crossover

1 Adjust the output level.

network (see page 21) is activated.

1 Select a filter.

2 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

: Frequencies lower than the

selected level are cut-off.

HPF

(Front/Rear)

connected subwoofer.

: Frequencies higher than the

selected level are cut-off.

LPF (Rear)

2 Select “On” to activate the selected filter.

• If you connect high-range speakers to

Front or Rear output, select “On” for

the corresponding HPF to prevent the

speakers from being damaged.

3 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

speakers (slope).

To adjust the input level of each

source—Vol Adj

This setting is required for each source except

for FM.

Once an adjustment is made, it will be

memorized. When you change the source the

volume level will automatically increase or

decrease according to the adjusted level.

3 Select a cut-off frequency according to the

connected speakers.

1.6kHz – 16.0kHz : Front HPF and Rear LPF

31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz : Rear HPF

1 Select a source before entering the SEL

menu.

4 Adjust the continuity of the sound among

2 Adjust to match the input level to the FM

speakers (slope).

sound level.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

3 Select or adjust the selected PSM item.

1 Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Demo

Display demonstration

• On [Initial]

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].

: Cancels.

• Off

Anime

Animation

• On [Initial]

: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power,

change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.

: Cancels.

• Off

Clock H

Hour adjustment

0 – 23 (1 – 12)

[Initial: 0 (0:00)]

: See also page 8 for setting.

Clock M

Minute adjustment

00 – 59

[Initial: 00 (0:00)]

24H/12H

• 12Hours

Time display mode

• 24Hours [Initial]

CLK Adj

• Auto [Initial]

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock

Clock adjustment

time) data in the RDS signal.

: Cancels.

• Off

Scroll*¹

• Once [Initial]

: For track information: scrolls the track information once.

For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.

For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.

• Auto

: For track information: repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in

between).

For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.

For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.

• Off

: For track information: cancels.

For RDS Radiotext: shows only the first page of the text message.

For DAB text: shows only headline if any.

Continued on the next page

Indications

Dimmer

Items

Settings, [reference page]

• Auto [Initial]

• Time Set

: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.

: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 25 for setting.

From: Any hour; To: Any hour

• Off

: Cancels.

• On

: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)

Bright

Display brightness

1 – 10 [Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear

and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4” takes

no effect.)

ID3 Tag

Tag display

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.

: Cancels.

Theme

• Large

: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 26

Display theme

(1 [Initial] or 2)

• Small

(1 [Initial] or 2)

for setting.

: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 26

for setting.

PTY Stby

29 PTY codes (see : Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [12].

PTY standby

page 11)

[Initial: News]

AF-Reg

• AF [Initial]

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station or service (the programme may differ

from the one currently received), [13, 31].

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.

: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “ON”).

Alternate frequency/

Regionalization

reception

• AF Reg

• Off

TA Vol

0 – 30 or 50*²

: When a traffic programme (TA) is received, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level.

Traffic announcement [Initial: 15]

volume

P-Search

Programme search

• On

• Off [Initial]

: Activates Programme Search, [13].

: Cancels.

IF Band

Intermediate frequency

band

• Auto [Initial]

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound

quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

• Wide

DAB AF*³

• On [Initial]

: Traces the programme among DAB services and FM RDS stations,

Alternative Frequency

Reception

[31].

• The AF indicator lights up.

: Cancels.

• Off

Announce*³

9 announcement : Select one of the announcement types for Announcement Standby

Announcement

Standby Reception

types (see page 31) Reception.

[Initial: Travel]

Indications

Items

Settings, [reference page]

Beep

Key-touch tone

• On [Initial]

• Off

: Activates the key-touch tone.

: Deactivates the key-touch tone.

Ext In*⁴

• Changer [Initial] : To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,

External input

[27].

• Ext In

: To use any other external component, [32]

Tel

• Muting 1/

Muting 2

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular

phone.

Telephone muting

• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the

source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

: Cancels.

• Off [Initial]

Amp Gain

• High PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 50

Amplifier gain control • Low PWR

: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the

speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)

: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.

• Off

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.

Selecting timer for the dimmer

You can dim the display at night or as you set

the timer.

2 Set the dimmer end time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

1 Select “Dimmer” from the PSM

menu.

2 Select “Time Set.”

3 Adjust the dimmer time.

1 Set the dimmer start time.

24Hours: [0 – 23]

4 Finish the procedure.

12Hours: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);

1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]

Selecting the graphic theme

Title assignment

You can assign titles to CDs (both in this

unit and in the CD changer) and the external

components (LINE-IN and EXT-IN).

You can select the graphic theme for large and

small display sizes (see also page 5).

1 Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.

2 Select the size of the display.

Sources

Maximum number of characters

Up to 32 characters (up to 30

discs)

CDs/CD-CH*

External

Up to 16 characters

component

3 Select the theme.

* You cannot assign names to any discs other

than conventional CDs.

1 Select the sources.

• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

• For CDs in the CD changer: Select

“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.

• For external component: Select

“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the

other display size and theme.

5 Finish the procedure.

2 Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).

3 Assign a title.

1 Select a character set.

To show the selected display theme, press

DISP repeatedly while playing a source.

A (A – Z: upper case) = a (a – z: lower

case) = 0 (numbers and symbols) =

Á (Accented letters: upper case) = á

(Accented letters: lower case) = (back to

the beginning)

2 Select a character.

3 Move to the next (or previous)

iPod®/D. player operations

character position.

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 until you

finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• To cancel the title entry

without registration, press

MENU.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To erase the entire title

In step 3...

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Available characters

In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z,

a – z), the following characters will be used.

Preparations:

Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external

input setting, see page 25.

Accented letters: upper case

Accented letters: lower case

Numbers and symbols

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Continued on the next page

⁄

Adjust the volume.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

work as the menu selecting buttons*.

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about

5 seconds.

– When you confirm the selection of a

track.

To pause*¹or stop*²

playback

To resume playback,

press it again.

2 Select the desired menu.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

To go to the next or

previous tracks

For iPod:

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs

Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the

beginning)

For iPod

For D. player

For D. player:

Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre Ô

Track Ô (back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

Selecting the playback modes

DAB tuner operations

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver

digital quality sound without any annoying

interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,

it can carry text, pictures, and data. When

transmitting, DAB combines several

2 Select one of the playback modes.

programmes (called “services”) to form one

“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called

“primary service”—can also be divided into its

components (called “secondary service”). A

typical ensemble has six or more programmes

(services) broadcast at the same time.

3 Select an item (see table below).

4 Finish the procedure.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do

the following:

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Alternative Frequency Reception (see

“DAB AF” on page 24).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner

KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have

another DAB tuner, consult your JVC

IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for

your DAB tuner.

Repeat play

One

: Functions the same as “Repeat

One” of the iPod or “Repeat

Mode = One” for the D. player.

: Functions the same as “Repeat

All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode

= All” for the D. player.

All

Off

: Cancels.

Random play

Album* : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Albums” of the iPod.

Song/On : Functions the same as “Shuffle

Songs” of the iPod or “Random

Play = On” of the D. player.

Start searching for an ensemble.

Off

: Cancels.

* For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums”

of the main “MENU.”

When an ensemble is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

Continued on the next page

4 Finish the procedure.

⁄

Select a service (either primary or

secondary) to listen to.

• The DRC indicator will be highlighted

only when receiving DRC signals from the

tuned service.

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !...

To search for your favorite service

You can search for either Dynamic or Static

PTY codes.

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on pages 11 and 12 for FM RDS stations.

• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the

DAB tuner and the FM tuner.

2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.

• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner

only.

When surrounding sounds are noisy

Storing DAB services in memory

Some service provides Dynamic Range Control

(DRC) signals together with their regular

programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low

level sounds to improve for your listening.

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for

each band.

1 Select a service you want.

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

3 Select “List.”

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “DRC.”

3 Select one of the DRC signal levels (1,

2, or 3).

4 Select a preset number.

• You can move to the lists of the other

DAB bands, but cannot store a service for

the other bands.

The reinforcement level increases from 1

to 3.

5 Store the service.

Using the Standby Receptions

TA (Road Traffic News) Standby

Reception

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on page 11 for FM RDS stations.

• You cannot activate TA Standby Reception

separately for the DAB tuner and for FM

tuner.

When using the remote controller

After tuning in to a service you want to

preset...

• The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level (see page 24).

PTY Standby Reception

• Operations are exactly the same as explained

on page 11 for FM RDS stations.

• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works

only using a dynamic PTY code.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

• You can neither store your favorite PTY nor

activate PTY Standby Reception separately for

the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.

• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby

Reception when the source is either “FM” or

“DAB.”

2 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

3 Select “List.”

Announcement Standby Reception

Announcement Standby Reception allows the

unit to switch temporarily to your favorite

service (announcement type).

4 Select a preset number.

To select your favorite announcement type,

see page 24.

Announcement types

Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Special, Rad Inf

(Radio Information), Sports, Finance

• You can move to the lists of the other

DAB bands by turning the control dial.

To activate the Announcement Standby

Reception

When using the remote controller

Directly select the preset number.

1 Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).

2 Select “Announce.”

Continued on the next page

When shipped from the factory, Alternative

Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency

Reception, see page 24.

3 Select an announce type.

To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS)

information

4 Finish the procedure.

• If the ANN indicator lights up,

Announcement Standby Reception is

activated.

• If the ANN indicator flashes,

Announcement Standby Reception is not

yet activated.

To activate, tune in to another service

providing these signals. The ANN

indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

Lights up when receiving a

service providing DLS.

To deactivate the Announcement Standby

Reception

Select “Off” in step 3 above.

• The ANN indicator goes off.

Tracing the same programme—

Alternative Frequency Reception

You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency

Reception.

• While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

cannot be received, this unit automatically

tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS

station, broadcasting the same programme.

• While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit

automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Back to the beginning

• The DLS screen will be temporarily canceled

when you operate the unit.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD

changer jack on the rear using the Line Input

Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input

Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see

pages 14 – 17; For iPod, or D.player, see pages

27 – 29.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

LINE-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

LINE IN plugs.

EXT-IN : For selecting the external

component connected to the

CD changer jack.

If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 25

and select the external input (“Ext In”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Adjust the volume.

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 18 – 22.)

Continued on the next page

To keep discs clean

More about this unit

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

Turning off the power

To play new discs

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

How to handle SD card

–All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

SD cards are precision products. DO NOT

impact, bend, drop, or wet them.

–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

–When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

FM RDS operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires

two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative

Frequency) to work correctly. Without

receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by

TA Standby Reception, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level (TA

VOL) if the current level is lower than the

preset level.

Stick-on label

• When Alternative Frequency Reception

is activated (with AF selected), Network-

Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network-

Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated

without deactivating Alternative Frequency

Reception. (See page 24.)

• Message service requires the RDS Radiotext

signal. It is available on most major stations.

If reception is weak, the service may become

unavailable. For any questions regarding the

content of this service, please contact your

broadcaster.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

–Discs are dirty or scratched.

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit

«http://www.rds.org.uk».

–Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

–The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

–CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written

with “Packet Write” method.

–There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

–Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal

stuck to the surface.

–Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Disc/SD card/USB memory operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA)

and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files

recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.

• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been

assigned to the audio CD (see page 26), it will

be shown on the display.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/

WMA track, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing an MP3/WMA discs

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,

1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the

control panel moves down, and the disc

automatically ejects from the loading slot.

• If you keep the control panel open for about

1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”

setting is turned “On”—see page 25) the

control panel returns to its previous position.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

Continued on the next page

• If the connected USB memory does not have

the correct files, “No Files” appears and the

unit returns to the previous source.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,

2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

• For SD card: The maximum number of

characters for folder name is 8 characters;

file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot

recognize folder with period (.) on the folder

name.

For USB memory: The maximum number

of characters for folder and file names is 25

characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag

information.

• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of

255 files and 63 folders.

For USB memory: This unit can recognize a

total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files

per folder).

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

* The parenthetic figure is the maximum

number of characters for file/folder names in

case the total number of files and folders is

313 or more.

• This unit can play back the files recorded in

VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO

format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a

USB memory

• While playing from an SD card or a USB

memory, the playback order may differ from

other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some

SD cards or USB memories due to their

characteristics or recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB memories

and connection ports, some USB memories

may not be attached properly or the

connection might be loose.

• It is not recommended to use a USB memory

wider than 20 mm as it will block you from

pressing some buttons on the control panel.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops.

Next time you select the same source again,

playback starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Sound adjustments

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30

discs, “Name Full” appears. Delete unwanted

titles before assignment.

• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can

also be shown if you play back the disc in the

unit and vise versa.

Selecting the DSP modes—DSP

• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the

recording condition of the sources:

– Monaural sources such as AM and

monaural FM broadcasting programs.

– Multiplex sound sources.

– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a

chorus, or only a few instruments.

• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are

used only to reproduce reflections and

reverberations in order to creates a being-

there feeling in your car compartment.

• If fader or balance has been set close to

its extreme, appropriate effect may not be

obtained.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 23). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker

number when “Defeat” is selected with

crossover network activated.

Storing your own sound modes

• If you do not want to store your current

adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment

to the current playback source, press

MENU to go back to the operation screen

of the current source. Adjustment you made

remains effective until you select a sound

mode.

Notice:

Setting the sound modes—SEL

• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to the center.

• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a

subwoofer is connected.

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

•

You cannot change the input level—

“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source

is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust

it.

General settings — PSM

DAB tuner operations

• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on

some vehicles, particularly on those having a

control dial for dimming. In this case, change

the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than

“Auto.”

• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from

“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume

level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit

automatically changes the volume level to

“Volume 30.”

• Only primary DAB services can be presetted

even when you store a secondary service.

• A previously preset DAB service is erased

when a new DAB service is stored in the same

preset number.

Continued on the next page

Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode

Preset equalizing value

63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz

Sound mode

Flat

+06

+04

+0200

+02+04

Hard

R&B

Pop

Jazz

Dance

Country

Reggae

Classic

User 1

User

Rock

+02

+06

+04

+0200

+06

+04

+02 00

+02+02+02+02+02+06

+0200

+02+02+02+06

+02+02+02+04

+06

+08

+04

+06

+04

–04

–0200

+02+02

+02+04

+06

+02+04

+04

+02+04

+04

+0200

200

User 3

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Connect Error” appears on the display.

Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach

it again (see pages 4 and 33).

• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the

control panel movement is freezed.

• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “No Text” appears on the display.

installation.

Store stations manually.

Connect the aerial firmly.

The station does not support RDS RT or the reception is

weak.

Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).

• “Loading” does not disappear.

The receiving signal is temporarily too weak to receive a

complete message although the service is available.

Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).

Symptoms

• Disc cannot be played back.

Remedies/Causes

Insert the disc correctly.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you

used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 17).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file

names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required (“File

Check” keeps flashing on the display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.

intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how

the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or

to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.

• “No Music” appears on the display.

Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 26).

Continued on the next page

Symptoms

• Noise is generated.

Remedies/Causes

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.

• “No Files” appears on the display.

• Readout time varies depending on the device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• “Not Support” appears on the display and

track skips.

The track is unplayable.

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then

returns to the previous source.

• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have

been formatted correctly.

The files included in the device are corrupted.

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly

while “File Check” appears on the display.

• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display

while playing tracks from an SD card.

Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The

control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes

interrupted.

MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the

device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try

again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small:

a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and

special characters (see page 26).

• “No Disc” appears on the display.

• “No Magazine” appears on the display.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press

the reset button of the CD changer.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes

than “Defeat.”

Deactivate crossover network (see page 21).

• Only high range sound or low range sound is

reproduced though full range speakers are

connected.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does • Check the connecting cable and its connection.

not work.

• Update the firmware version.

Charge the battery.

•

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press

POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/

D. player.

• “Disconnect” appears on the display.

• Playback stops.

Check the connecting cable and its connection.

The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart

the playback operation using the control panel (see page

28).

• No sound can be heard when connecting an

iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when

connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it

again.

• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the

display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.

• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display. Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/

D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work Reset the iPod or D. player.

after disconnecting from this unit.

• “No DAB Signal” appears on the display.

• “Reset 08” appears on the display.

Search for another ensemble.

Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and reset the

unit (see page 2).

• The DAB tuner does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the display. Check the DAB aerial and its connections.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• SD logo is a trademark.

• Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.

Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered

trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Specifications

Maximum Power

Output:

Continuous Power

Output (RMS):

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to

20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total

harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:

Equalizer Control

Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Frequencies:

Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz

(9 bands)

Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,

100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,

1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)

Level:

10 dB

Frequency Response:

Signal to Noise Ratio:

Level/Impedance:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

70 dB

1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-In:

Line-Out:

Output Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminals:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

LINE IN, CD changer

Frequency Range:

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

(MW)

(LW)

522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

144 kHz to 279 kHz

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

Sensitivity:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

20 μV/65 dB

50 μV

MW Tuner

LW Tuner

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Wow and Flutter:

MP3:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

98 dB

102 dB

Less than measurable limit

32 kbps – 320 kbps

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16

Storage:

8 MB – 512 MB

Playable Audio Format:

MP3:

MP3/WMA

8 kbps – 320 kbps

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

8 kbps – 192 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

Format:

FAT 12/16/32

Storage:

Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

MP3/WMA

Less than 500 mA

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3:

Bit Rate:

32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling Frequency:

MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz

MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz

MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz

5 kbps – 320 kbps

WMA:

Bit Rate:

Sampling Frequency:

8 kHz – 48 kHz

Power Requirement:

Grounding System:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):

Panel Size (approx.):

0°C to +40°C

182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

1.7 kg (excluding accessories)

Mass (approx.):

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства

обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

EN, GE, RU

0106DTSMDTJEIN

KD-SH1000

Installation/Connection Manual

Einbau/Anschlußanleitung

Руководство по установке/подключению

GET0366-013A

[EY]

0106DTSMDTJEIN

EN, GE, RU

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В

Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш

über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC

Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.

автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор

напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера

автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем

Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и

осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное

устройство на шасси автомобиля.

WARNINGS

WARNUNGEN

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse

installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.

• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des

Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.

Примечания:

Notes:

Hinweise:

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем

указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной

мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели

устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если

максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в

режим “Amp Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25).

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum

• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.

Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC

Autoradiohändler.

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being

damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit

einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung

weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „Amp Gain“ anders ein, um

Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 25 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте

НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.

Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen

der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband

umwickeln.

• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau

des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.

Heat sink

Abstrahlblech

Радиатор

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen

connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и

подключению громкоговорителей:

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к

аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет

повреждено.

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей

к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему

соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer

beschädigt wird.

• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des

Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die

Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.

Parts list for installation and connection

Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß

Список деталей для установки и подключения

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.

consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-

Autoradiohändler.

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с

дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

A / B

Sleeve

Halterung

Муфта

Trim plate

Frontrahmen

Декоративную панель

Hard case/Control panel

Etui/Schalttafel

Жесткий футляр/панель управления

Power cord

Stromkable

Кабель питания

Washer (ø5)

Unterlegscheibe (ø5)

Шайба (њ5)

Lock nut (M5)

Sicherungsmutter (M5)

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)

Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)

Rubber cushion

Gummipuffer

Резиновый чехол

Handles

Griffe

Рычаги

Remote controller

Fernbedienung

диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния

Battery

Batterie

Бaтapeйкa

INSTALLATION

EINBAU

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

(IM ARMATURENBRETT)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have

any questions or require information regarding installation kits,

consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company

supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed • Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen

by a qualified technician.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen

Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes

brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein

Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у

Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки, обратитесь

к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в компанию,

поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это

устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.

Do the required electrical connections.

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen

Anschlüsse vor.

Выполните необходимые подключения

контактов, как показано на оборотной

стороне этой инструкции.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die

Manschette sicher festzuhalten.

Отогните соответствующие

фиксаторы, предназначенные для

прочной установки корпуса.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.

Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить предохранитель, расположенный сзади.

Fit the protrusions outside the receiver.

Die Vorsprünge außen am Receiver anpassen.

Выступы должны находиться с внешней стороны приемника.

Removing the unit

Ausbau des Geräts

Удаление устройства

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und

dann ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt,

so daß das Gerät entfernt werden kann.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните

их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.

When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden

der Anker-Option / При использовании

дополнительной стойки

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne

Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Gerät an seiner Stelle.

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.

Stay (option)

Anker (Option)

Стойка

Fire wall

Feuerwand

Стена

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*³

(дополнительно)

Not supplied for this unit.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Hе входит в комплект поставки.

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*³

Bracket*³

Dashboard

Armaturenbrett

Приборная панель

Konsole*³

Кронштейн*³

Screw (option)

Schraube (Option)

Винт (дополнительно)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*³

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*³

Pocket

Taschen

Карман

Bracket*³

Konsole*³

Кронштейн*³

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von

weniger als 30˚ auf.

Hinweis

: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden

längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.

использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

Caution when installing / Vorsicht bei der Installation / Предостережение во время установки

Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.

• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).

Setzen Sie den Receiver in die Montagemanschette, indem Sie die vier Ecken der Deckplatte verwenden.

• Drücken Sie NICHT auf die Platte selber (in der Abbildung schraffiert).

Поместите приемник в монтажную панель, используя четыре угла лицевой панели.

• НЕ нажимайте на панель (затемнена на рисунке).

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

If your car is equipped with the ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-

(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)

connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem

ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.

Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /

Исходная схема соединений

Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /

Преобразованная схема соединений 1

From the car body

Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie

От корпуса автомобиля

ISO connector

ISO-Steckverbinder

Разъем ISO

Use modified wiring

if the unit does not turn on.

Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung

wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений

ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в

комплект поставки

Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /

Преобразованная схема соединений 2

Y: Yellow

Gelb

R: Red

* Choke coil

* Drosselspule

Rot

View from the lead side

Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen

Желтый

Красный

* Дроссельная катушка

Вид со стороны выводов

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen. Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте

Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.

проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может

привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова

автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

body may be different in color.

sich farblich unterscheiden.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в

specified in the illustration below.

wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.

указанном ниже порядке.

3 Подключите кабель антенны.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.

4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.

4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к

устройству.

If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your

car, see diagram for speaker connection.

Wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage in Ihrem Fahrzeug

eingebaut haben, siehe Zeichnung zum Lautsprecheranschluss.

Если в автомобиле установлена трехполосная система

динамиков, схему подключения динамиков см. на диаграмме

To subwoofer (see diagram

)

An Subwoofer

LINE IN

(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / см. схему

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram

An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan

К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления

(siehe Schaltplan

)

К низкочастотному динамику

)

(см. схему

)

(см. схему

)

15 A fuse

15 A Sicherung

Предохранитель 15 A

Aerial

connector

Antennenanschluss

Разъем антенны

Ignition switch

Zündschalter

Переключатель зажигания

Black

Schwarz

Черный

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

Yellow*⁵

Gelb*⁵

Rear ground terminal

Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme

Задний разъем заземления

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen

an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)

(постоянный 12 В)

Желтый*⁵

Line out (see diagram

Schutz kappen Signalausgang

(siehe Schaltplan

К выходу (см. схему

)

Red

Rot

Красный

Fuse block

)

Sicherungsblock

Блок предохранителя

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

)

Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

To external components (see diagram

An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan

К внешним устройствам (см. схему

)

Blue with white stripe

Blau mit weißem Streifen

Синий с белой полосой

Not supplied for this unit.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Не входит в комплект поставки.

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation,

this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be

turned on.

Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor

dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst

die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот

провод, иначе питание не включится.

Orange with white stripe

Orange mit weißem Streifen

Оранжевый с белой полосой

To car light control switch

Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter

К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля

Brown

Braun

Коричневый

To cellular phone system

An Mobiltelefonsystem

К мобильной телефонной системе

White with black stripe

Weiß mit schwarzem

Streifen

Белый с черной

полосой

White

Weiß

Белый

Gray with black stripe

Grau mit schwarzem

Streifen

Серый с черной

полосой

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Lila mit schwarzem

Streifen

Пурпурный с черной

полосой

Purple

Grau

Grün mit schwarzem

Streifen

Grün

Lila

Серый

Зеленый

Пурпурный

Зеленый с черной

полосой

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)

Правый громкоговоритель

(передний)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)

Левый громкоговоритель

(передний)

Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)

Левый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)

Правый громкоговоритель

(задний)

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту

дистанционного управления

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,

you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s

OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is

required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for

details.

Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist,

können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr

Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von

JVC (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere

Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.

Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом

дистанционного управления, его можно использовать для

управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим

адаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления JVC

OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля.

За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику

автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.

OE remote adapter (not supplied)

Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)

Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не поставляется)

Steering wheel remote input

Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung

Вход рулевого пульта дистанционного

управления

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)

Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в автомобиле)

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Anschließen der externen Verstärker und/oder Subwoofer / Подключение внешних

усилителей и/или низкочастотного динамика

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

Sie können Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu

erweitern.

Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной

стереосистемы.

• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen)

an das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über

dieses Gerät gesteuert werden kann.

•

Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой

полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования

так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.

• For amplifier only:

– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the

amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio

signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to

prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 25 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi

sounds reproduced from this unit.

When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down

the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best

performance from this unit.

• Nur für den Verstärker:

• Только для усилителя:

– Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am

Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses

Geräts unbenutzt lassen.

– Sie können den eingebauten Verstärker abschalten und die

Audiosignale nur zu dem(n) externen Verstärker(n) ausgeben, um

scharfen Ton zu erhalten und Hitzestau im Unit zu vermeiden (siehe

Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

– Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного

устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте

провода громкоговорителей данного устройства

неиспользованными.

–

Для получения более чистого звука и предотвращения

внутреннего перегрева приемника можно отключить

встроенный усилитель и использовать для усиления

аудиосигнала только внешние усилители (см. стр. 25

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ).

Уровень выходного сигнала линии данного устройства

поддерживается высоким, чтобы обеспечить высококачественный

звук, воспроизводимый данным устройством.

–

Der Ausgangspegel dieses Geräts wird auf einem hohen Wert gehalten,

um den Hifi-Klang zu unterstützen, den dieses Gerät reproduziert.

Wenn Sie einen externen Verstärker an dieses Gerät anschließen,

stellen Sie den Verstärkungsregler des externen Verstärkers herunter,

um die bestmögliche Leistung dieses Geräts zu erzielen.

При подключении внешнего усилителя к данному устройству

убавьте регулировку усиления на внешнем усилителе, чтобы

обеспечить оптимальные характеристики работы данного

устройства.

Remote lead

Fernbedienungsleitung

Провод внешнего устройства

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

Subwoofer

Низкочастотный динамик

Rear speakers

Hintere Lautsprecher

Задние громкоговорители

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

Rear speakers

Front speakers

Vordere Lautsprecher

Передние громкоговорители

Hintere Lautsprecher

Задние громкоговорители

Front speakers (see diagram

)

Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan

)

Передние громкоговорители (см. схему

)

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint

(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht

lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter

befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте,

не покрытом краской (если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как прикреплять провод).

Невыполнение этого требования может привести к повреждению данного устройства.

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO

connector and connect them to the amplifier.

Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des

ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen

diese an den Verstärker an.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект

поставки)

Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей

разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.

TROUBLESHOOTING

FEHLERSUCHE

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.

• Сработал предохранитель.

• The fuse blows.

* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?

• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.

* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?

• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.

Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?

• Ton verzerrt.

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher

zusammen geerdet?

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

• Питание не включается.

* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.

Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?

• Звук искажен.

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)

громкоговорителей?

• Шум мешает звучанию.

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси

автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

• Störgeräusche im Klang.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an

shorter and thicker cords?

das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?

• Gerät wird heiß.

• This unit becomes hot.

• Устройство нагревается.

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher

zusammen geerdet?

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Приемник не работает.

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.

* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Lautsprecheranschlüsse für die 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage / Схема

подключения динамиков для трехполосной системы динамиков

You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3- Sie können eine Welt des “reinen Tons” in Ihrem Fahrzeug genießen,

Чтобы в полной мере насладиться миром “чистого звука” в

автомобиле, подключите трехполосную систему динамиков

(высоко-, средне- и низкочастотные динамики).

way network speaker system (high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).

wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner/

Subwoofer) anschließen.

IMPORTANT:

WICHTIG:

ВАЖНО:

If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in

the car, make sure of the following.

Wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage im Fahrzeug

eingebaut haben, überprüfen Sie Folgendes.

• Schließen Sie die Lautsprecheranlage an, wie unten gezeigt.

• Vor der Verwendung der Anlage aktivieren Sie das Crossover-

Netz und stellen die geeigneten Schwellenfrequenzen für HPF/LPF

(besonders für HPF) ein; andernfalls können die Lautsprecher

beschädigt werden.

Если в автомобиле установлена трехполосная система

динамиков, выполните следующие настройки.

• Подключите систему динамиков, как показано на рисунке

ниже.

• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.

• Before using the system, activate crossover network and

preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF

(especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.

• For details about the setting, see pages 21 and 22 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.

•

Перед использованием системы активируйте разделительный

фильтр и установите предельные значения для самых высоких

и низких частот HPF/LPF (особенно для высоких – HPF); в

противном случае возможно повреждение динамиков.

• Einzelheiten zur Einstellung siehe Seite 21 und 22 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.

• Подробную информацию о настройках см. на страницах

22 ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ.

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output

Bei Anschließen der Lautsprecher (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner) über den Lautsprecherausgang

При подключении динамиков (высокого или среднего диапазона) через выход динамиков

White

Weiß

Белый

Gray

Grau

Серый

Right high-range speaker

Rechter Hochtöner

Правый динамик высокого

Left high-range speaker

Linker Hochtöner

Левый динамик высокого диапазона

White with black stripe

Weiß mit schwarzem Streifen

Белый с черной полосой

Gray with black stripe

Grau mit schwarzem Streifen

Серый с черной полосой

диапазона

Green

Grün

Purple

Lila

Зеленый

Пурпурный

Right mid-range speaker

Rechter Mitteltöner

Правый динамик среднего

Left mid-range speaker

Linker Mitteltöner

Левый динамик среднего диапазона

Green with black stripe

Grün mit schwarzem Streifen

Зеленый с черной полосо

Purple with black stripe

Lila mit schwarzem Streifen

Пурпурный с черной полосой

диапазона

Connecting subwoofer / Anschließen des Subwoofers / Подключение

низкочастотного динамика

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)

Remote lead

Fernbedienungsleitung

Провод внешнего устройства

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Y-Anschluß (für diesen Unit nicht mitgeliefert)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект)

Subwoofer

Низкочастотный

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

динамик

To subwoofer out

Zum Subwoofer-Ausgang

К выходу низкочастотного

динамика

When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to

obtain more powerful sound

Beim Anschließen der Lautsprecher (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner) über die externen Verstärker—für

kräftigeren Klang

При подключении динамиков (высокого или среднего диапазона частот) через внешние

усилители—для получения более мощного звука

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

To LINE OUT (REAR)

Zu LINE OUT (REAR)

К разъему LINE OUT (REAR)

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

To LINE OUT (FRONT)

Zu LINE OUT (FRONT)

К разъему LINE OUT (FRONT)

Left high-range speaker

Right high-range speaker

Rechter Hochtöner

Правый динамик высокого диапазона

Linker Hochtöner

Левый динамик высокого

диапазона

Left mid-range speaker

Right mid-range speaker

Linker Mitteltöner

Rechter Mitteltöner

Левый динамик среднего

Правый динамик среднего диапазона

диапазона

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching

the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen

Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской (если оно покрыто краской,

удалите краску перед тем, как прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может привести к повреждению данного устройства.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Подключение внешних устройств

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod® oder JVC D. Player / Устройство автоматической смены

компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, Apple iPod® или проигрыватель JVC D.

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Changer“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) /

Установите для внешнего входа значение “Changer” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.

Sie können diese Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der

Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно,

как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*⁶или D. можно

подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит

в комплект поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для

проигрывателя D.).

The iPod*⁶or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod*⁶oder D. Player kann mit einem

(not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)—

KS-PD100 (für iPod) oder KS-PD500 (für D. Player).

CAUTION / ACHTUNG / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:

•

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.

• Перед подключением внешних компонентов убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Anschluss 1 (integrierter Anschluss) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)

Apple iPod (продается отдельно)

oder

или

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. Player (getrennt gekauft)

Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)

JVC CD changer

JVC DAB tuner

CD-Wechsler von JVC

DAB-Tuner von JVC

Устройство автоматической

Тюнер DAB JVC

смены компакт-дисков JVC

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /

Разъем устройства автоматической

смены компакт-дисков

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)

Apple iPod (продается отдельно)

oder

или

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. Player (getrennt gekauft)

Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)

JVC CD changer

JVC DAB tuner

CD-Wechsler von JVC

DAB-Tuner von JVC

Устройство автоматической

Тюнер DAB JVC

смены компакт-дисков JVC

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /

Разъем устройства автоматической

смены компакт-дисков

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

Anschließen des für CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner mitgelieferten Kabels

Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект поставки устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

или тюнера DAB

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.

iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.

Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / Другое внешнее устройство

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Ext In“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / Установите для

внешнего входа значение “Ext In” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25.)

External component

Externe Komponente

Внешнее устройство

CD changer jack

Buchse für CD-Wechsler

Разъем устройства

External component

автоматической смены

Externe Komponente

компакт-дисков

Внешнее устройство

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker

Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм

External component

Externe Komponente

Внешнее устройство

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

AUX-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58

(не входит в комплект поставки)

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект

поставки)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

PYLE Audio Blu ray Player PLDVD92 User Manual
ProMaster MyMuvi Movie Machine MyMuvi Movie Machine User Manual
Philips SJM3200 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Phone With Answering Machine KXTG7642M User Manual
Lowepro DC 8330i User Manual
Lochinvar KNIGHT 51 211 User Manual
Kenwood CD RECEIVER KDC 126 User Manual
JVC XV BP10 User Manual
JVC TK C751 User Manual
JVC LYT0002 0M8B User Manual